JP6655498B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a resilient pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control board that controls the effect of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display and the accessories on the game board. In the pachinko gaming machines, the operation effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button while the special symbol is being displayed or during the special game, and the effect is advanced when the effect button is operated There is something to do. Patent Document 1 discloses a technique relating to the production of this type of gaming machine.

JP 2011-98143 A

  By the way, the operation effect of this type of gaming machine is merely a function of dropping a character or making a character appear upon operation of the effect button, and there is room for improvement in terms of amusement of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to further enhance the interest in gaming in a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine of the present invention has an operation means, a determination means for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by the establishment of a starting condition, and a symbol display based on a determination result of the determination means. After the symbols are variably displayed by the means, a symbol display control means for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result, and the symbol display control means stops the symbols when the determination means determines that the jackpot has been won. After the display, a special game execution means for executing a special game corresponding to the won jackpot, and a stage effect according to a predetermined operation on the operation means within an operation acceptance valid period based on a result of the determination by the determination means. And a non-step operation in which an effect different from the step effect progresses in accordance with a predetermined operation on the operation means within the operation acceptance valid period. Effect, and effect control means for causing the effect means to execute one or more effects among a plurality of effects including a specific notice effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation, and the effect control means, During the variation display of the symbol, when performing the step operation effect that is difficult to be selected when the determination result is not a big hit, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect before the execution of the stage operation effect. When the non-step operation effect that is easily selected when the non-step operation effect is executed is performed, the non-stage operation effect is provided with a regulation unit that restricts the execution of the specific notice effect before the execution of the non-stage operation effect. Offer machine.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of the operation effect of a game machine can be raised further.

It is a front view of the game machine which is a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a state in which a first movable auditorium 330a in the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1 has dropped. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a state in which a second movable role object 330b in the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1 is tilted. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a relationship between types of jackpots in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and combinations of a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the photo image and the frame color of each stage in the step-up effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and the reliability of the jackpot. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing an example of the effect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an input control process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a first starting port detection switch input process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special symbol holding storage area of a main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and an effect information storage area of an effect control board. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a preliminary determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a normal symbol lottery determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a symbol determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special game control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special winning opening opening / closing control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game end process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a special game end time setting table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose general-purpose control process of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a fluctuation effect pattern determination table of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead hold change effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure showing a look-ahead reservation display change production effect execution determination table and a final stage suspension display mode determination table of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a hold display change effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a hold display change effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol determination processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a first bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd character thing operation specific notice effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a second bonus item operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the step-up effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a step-up effect execution determination table and a step-up effect final stage determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure showing a step-up effect scenario determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue operation effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a speech operation effect execution execution determination table and a speech operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a speech operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the roulette operation effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect execution determination table and a roulette operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a roulette operation specific announcement effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the gauge operation effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect execution determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a reference destination determination table of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a middle table and a lower table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view illustrating a gauge operation effect progress pattern determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the timing operation effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a view showing a timing operation effect execution determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a timing operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart showing a reach back button operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 2 is a flowchart showing a step-up back button operation effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a view showing a step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect selection processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round game effect control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control processing of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing contents of an operation information storage area of an effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and an example of updating the contents. It is a figure showing an example of production of a game machine which is a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table of the gaming machine which is the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the 2nd role thing operation operation specific notice effect execution determination table of the gaming machine which is the second embodiment of the present invention.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating the overall configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60 so as to be visible.

  One end of the glass door 50 (the left side facing the gaming machine 1) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided on the other end of the glass door 50 (on the right side of the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked by a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18a for detecting the opening of the glass door 50.

  Outside the portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol reservation display 23, a second special symbol reservation display 24, a normal A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold display 25 are provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 notifies a result of a lottery lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “start winning prize”). It is. The second special symbol display device 21 informs of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “start winning”). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols each of which can be identified. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are configured by 7-segment LEDs. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as a “first special symbol”, and a special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately referred to as a “second special symbol”. Design ".

  The first special symbol hold display 23 displays the number of changes in the first special symbol held. The second special symbol hold indicator 24 displays the number of changes in the second special symbol held.

  Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol by the start winning of the first opening 14, but the satisfaction of the previously established start condition. Occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol by the start winning of the second start opening 15, but the satisfaction of the previously established start condition. Occurs when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Each of the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24 will be specifically described. In the first special symbol reservation display 23, the number of reservations of the change of the first special symbol is changed. In the case of one LED, the left LED is turned on. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is two, the right LED is turned on. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is three, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights. If the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is four, the left and right two LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol reservation display 23.

  The ordinary symbol display device 22 notifies the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 13. The ordinary symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols that can be identified. The normal symbol hold display 25 displays the number of hold of the change of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reserves on the ordinary symbol hold display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24.

  The game area 6 of the gaming machine 1 has a substantially egg shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right area 6R on the right side. At the left end of the left region 6L, there are provided rails 5a and 5b extending in an arc shape with a slightly wider interval than the game ball therebetween. A ball return preventing piece 5c is provided at the upper end of the inner rail 5b among these rails 5a and 5b.

  In the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1, slightly inward of the left corner and the right corner, three left and right effect lighting devices (lamp) 34 are provided. The effect lighting device 34 performs a game effect by emitting light under the control of the lamp control board 140.

  An audio output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside the three effect lighting devices 34 on each of the right and left above the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. Under the control of the image control board 150, the sound output device 32 performs a game effect by sound (output of various background music (BGM) and output of a sound effect).

  An effect button 35 is provided below a portion of the glass door 50 that covers the game area 6. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by a pressing operation. The effect button 35 is provided with an effect button detection switch 35a. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects that the effect button 35 has been pressed, it outputs an ON signal indicating that fact.

  A cross key 39 is provided to the left of the effect button 35. The cross key 39 includes an up cursor key 39A, a down cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the up cursor key 39A, the down cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

  The up cursor key 39A, down cursor key 39B, left cursor key 39C, and right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are provided with cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d. The center key 39E is provided with a center key detection switch 39e. When detecting that the up cursor key 39A has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39a outputs an ON signal indicating this. When detecting that the down cursor key 39B has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39b outputs an ON signal indicating this. When detecting that the left cursor key 39C has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39c outputs an ON signal indicating that. When detecting that the right cursor key 39D has been pressed, the cross key detection switch 39d outputs an ON signal indicating that. When detecting that the center key 39E has been pressed, the center key detection switch 39e outputs an ON signal indicating this.

  On the glass door 50, on the back side of the effect button 35, a saucer for storing game balls is provided. The operation handle 3 is provided at the lower right of the effect button 35 on the glass door 50. The player performs a firing operation which is an operation of gripping the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

  A touch sensor 3a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is configured by a capacitance-type proximity switch that uses a change in capacitance due to a contact of the player with the operation handle 3. The tray of the glass door 50 is provided with a ball feed solenoid 4b. The ball feed solenoid 4b is constituted by a straight-moving solenoid. A firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided near the rotating portion of the operation handle 3. The firing volume 3b is composed of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

  These units 3a, 3b, 4a, and 4b perform operations related to the launch of the game balls in the saucer to the game area 6 under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the firing control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the firing volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 3 to the firing control board 160. The firing control board 160 performs control to energize the firing solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the firing volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

  The ball feed solenoid 4b feeds the game balls in the receiving tray one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the firing solenoid 4a by controlling the energization of the firing control board 160. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the driving member. The game ball sent out from the tray toward the striking member is struck between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the striking member, and is guided upward by the rails 5a and 5b. The game ball that has risen between the rails 5a and 5b reaches the game area 6 through the ball return preventing piece 5c, and falls in the game area 6 in an unpredictable manner.

  Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 4a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 160. Thus, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot is fired each time the firing solenoid 4a rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

  At the upper part of the game area 6, there is provided a decorative member 7 which affects the flow of the game ball. At the upper part of the game area 6 behind the decorative member 7 and at the right end of the game area 6, effect driving devices 33a and 33b are provided. The effect driving devices 33a and 33b effect a game by the movement of the device itself under the control of the lamp control board 140. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect driving device 33a includes an annular first movable role 330a and an actuator that supports the upper edge thereof. When the effect driving device 33b receives a signal instructing driving of the first movable accessory 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b is located at a position on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The first movable role 330a is lowered to the center position of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 5, the effect driving device 33b has a stick-shaped second movable role 330b and an actuator supporting the lower end thereof. When receiving a signal instructing driving of the second movable role 330b from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33b moves the second movable role 330b from the right end position of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The game area 6 is inclined toward the center position (the position shown in FIG. 5).

  A plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided below the left area 6L in the game area 6. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

  A first special winning opening 16 is provided below the right area 6R in the gaming area 6. The first special winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening detection switch 16a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls is paid out.

  The first special winning opening 16 is provided with a first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b, which is a special electric accessory, and a first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c for opening and closing the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b. I have. The first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the first special winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b stands substantially flush with the board surface of the game area 6 and enters a closed state in which the first special winning opening 16 is closed. When the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in an open state inclined forward with the lower edge of the first special winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

  While the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, game balls falling from above the first special winning opening 16 pass through the front of the first special winning opening 16 as they are. Therefore, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the first special winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first special winning opening 16 are directed above the first special winning opening / closing door 16b. It hits the receiving surface and is guided to the first big winning opening 16 side. For this reason, while the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the first special winning opening 16.

  A second big winning opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the game area 6. The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening detection switch 17a for detecting the entry of a game ball in the second special winning opening 17. When the second special winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of the game balls are paid out.

  The second special winning opening 17 is provided with a second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, which is a special electric accessory, and a second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c for opening and closing the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b. I have. The second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape having substantially the same dimensions as the second special winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second special winning opening 17. When the second winning opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second winning opening / closing door 17b stands substantially flush with the board of the game area 6 and enters a closed state in which the second winning opening 17 is closed. When the second big win opening / closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second big winning opening / closing door 17b is in an open state inclined forward with the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

  While the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, game balls falling from diagonally above and to the left of the second special winning opening 17 pass directly in front of the second special winning opening 17. I do. For this reason, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second special winning opening 17 are directed upward of the second special winning opening / closing door 17b. It hits the receiving surface and is guided to the side of the second big winning opening 17. For this reason, while the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b is in the open state, the game balls can easily enter the second special winning opening 17.

  A first starting port 14 and a second starting port 15 are provided above the second big winning port 17 at the lower center of the game area 6. The first starting port 14 and the second starting port 15 are arranged vertically. The first starting port 14 is provided with a first starting port detection switch 14a for detecting the passage of a game ball at the first starting port 14. When the first starting port detection switch 14a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting port 15 is provided with a second starting port detection switch 15a for detecting the passage of the game ball at the second starting port 15. When the second starting port detection switch 15a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out.

  The second starting port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15b. These movable pieces 15b can be switched between open and closed states by a starting port opening and closing solenoid 15c. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b enter a closed state in which each of the movable pieces 15b stands upright. When the starting opening / closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b enter an open state in which the pair of movable pieces 15b are inclined in an inverted C shape. The movable piece 15b forms an electric tulip (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an "electric tuy") as an ordinary electric accessory. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above and below the second starting port 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and rebound. For this reason, while the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling toward the second starting port 15 from diagonally above and below the second starting port 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second starting port 15 is reached. For this reason, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15.

  A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly above the first special winning opening 16 in the right area 6R of the gaming area 6. The ordinary symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of a game ball in the ordinary symbol gate 13.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1, a jackpot is established when the start condition of the first special symbol is established by the winning start of the first opening 14 and the start condition of the second special symbol is established by the winning start of the second opening 15. When the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped at a symbol corresponding to the type of the jackpot through a variable display for a predetermined period, and the stop symbol indicates. A special game according to the type of jackpot is executed. In the special game, the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 until the winning number of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. Is a round game of one round, and this round game is repeated a plurality of times. There are the following seven types of jackpots of the gaming machine 1.

a1. 1st 16R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the first large winning opening 16 is opened until the winning number of the first large winning opening 16 reaches a prescribed number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds have elapsed → the first large winning opening 16 for 2 seconds. The first winning opening 16 is opened and closed in a manner of opening and closing the winning opening 16.

  When this jackpot is won, the gaming state relating to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game is a low-probability gaming state (a state in which the jackpot lottery winning probability is 2/599) and a high-probability gaming state (the jackpot lottery winning probability). Is 20/599), which is a high-probability gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when this jackpot is won, the game state related to the ordinary electric auditors product (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is changed to the electric chew support state (movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time and the second starting port is opened). 15 is a state in which the winning is easy to start) and a non-powered chewing support state (a state in which the movable piece 15b is hard to be opened) is a powering chewing support state advantageous to the player, and the gaming state related to the special symbol is A time shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively short) and a non-time shortened state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is relatively long); Becomes The state relating to the ordinary electric accessory and the state relating to the special symbol depend on each other. When the state relating to the ordinary electric accessory becomes the electric chew support state, the state relating to the special symbol becomes a time reduction state. In the following description, a state in which the state related to the ordinary electric auditorium is the electric chew support state and the state relating to the special symbol is the time shortening state is referred to as a “time reduction game state”, and the state relating to the ordinary electric auditorium is non-operational. The state in which the electric chew support state and the state relating to the special symbol are the non-time shortening state is referred to as a "non-time saving gaming state".

  During the non-time-saving gaming state, the gaming machine 1 has a normal symbol lottery winning probability of 1/65536, a normal symbol fluctuation time of 29 seconds, and a normal symbol lottery winning time of the second starting port 15 per one time. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. During the time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is 65535/65536, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds, and the movable piece 15b of the second starting port 15 per election of the ordinary symbol lottery is won. The opening time is 3.5 seconds.

b1. The first 8R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. In the eight round games, the second big winning opening 17 is opened until the winning number of the second big winning opening 17 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or 29 seconds elapse → the second big winning for 2 seconds. The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing mode of closing the opening 17. When this big hit is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high probability game state and a time reduction game state.

c1. 1st 8R normal winning This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a low probability game state and a time reduction game state.

d1. The first 2R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, two round games of a first round and a second round are performed. In the two round games, the opening of the second special winning opening 17 until the winning number of the second special winning opening 17 reaches a specified number (for example, 9) or 0.4 seconds has elapsed → the second opening of the second special winning opening 17 for two seconds. The second special winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of closing the special winning opening 17. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

f1. 2nd 16R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, 16 round games from the first round to the 16th round are performed. The manner of opening and closing the first special winning opening 16 in the 16 round games is the same as that for the first 16R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

g1. 2nd 8R probability change jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

i1. Second 8R normal hit This big hit is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the special game when the big hit is won, eight round games of the first to eighth rounds are performed. The manner of opening and closing the second special winning opening 17 in the eight round games is the same as that for the first 8R probability change. When this jackpot is won, the game state after the end of the special game is a low probability game state and a time reduction game state.

  In the following description, the first 16R probability change, the first 8R probability change, the first 2R probability change, the second 16R probability change, and the second 8R probability change are collectively referred to as “probable change”. . In addition, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as “normal hit” as appropriate. In addition, the first 16R probability variation and the second 16R probability variation are collectively referred to as “16R variation”. The first 8R probability variation, the first 8R normal variation, the second 8R probability variation, and the second 8R normal variation are collectively referred to as "per 8R". The first 2R probability variation is appropriately referred to as “2R variation”.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not a normal symbol hits or not is executed in response to establishment of a normal symbol starting condition by passing a game ball through the normal symbol gate 13, and a win in this normal symbol lottery is performed. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is usually an electric accessory, is opened for a predetermined period. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the game ball easily passes through the second starting port 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily satisfied.

  At the center of the bottom of the game area 6, an out port 11 is provided. Game balls that reach the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17. Is discharged through the outlet 11.

  An image display device 31 is fitted between the decoration member 7 and the first starting port 14 in the game area 6. The image display device 31 performs a game effect by displaying images under the control of the image control board 150.

  More specifically, the gaming machine 1 performs a symbol variation effect in accordance with the symbol variation from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the symbol variation effect, the image display device 31 displays a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R). , 36Z are appropriately referred to as “effect design 36”). The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are caused to change in synchronization with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21, and the first special symbol display device 20 and the second symbol symbol 36Z. The same big hit determination result as that indicated by the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 is notified.

  The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R include "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, " There are "7" symbols, "8" symbols, and "9" symbols. The display modes of the fourth symbol 36Z include a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), when the change display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15 starts, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed. Each is "1" design-> "2" design-> "3" design-> "4" design-> "5" design-> "6" design-> "7" design-> "8" design-> "9" design-> "1" design The pattern "Z" starts the cycle display, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts the cycle display of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third display mode → the first display mode. When the special symbol stops after a fluctuation display for a predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop in a combination corresponding to the stopped and displayed special symbol. If the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stopped and displayed is a big hit, the special game is executed. The jackpot type reported by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect always matches the jackpot type reported by the special symbol.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of jackpots and combinations of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, when the winning is determined in the jackpot lottery by 16R, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either "333" or "777", and the fourth symbol 36Z is in the third display mode. Stop at the combination of

  In the case of winning the 8R probability change in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". ", The fourth symbol 36Z stops in the combination of the second display mode. In the case of winning the 8R regular winning in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", "999". ", The fourth symbol 36Z stops in the combination of the first display mode.

  In the case of winning the 2R probability change in the jackpot lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped in a combination of "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z in the first display mode. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the game stops in any combination other than the above.

  Here, the display size of the fourth symbol 36Z is extremely small as compared with the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. For this reason, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop at the same symbol combination other than “777” and “333”, it is difficult to know which one of the 8R probability change and the 8R normal hit has been won. It has become. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop at the symbol combination of "777" or "333", it is easily understood that at the time of the stop, the winning has been achieved per 16R probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in a jackpot combination to perform a special game, a special game effect is performed in accordance with the special game. I do. In the special game effect, the image display device 31 displays an image for guiding right-handed, an image indicating the number of rounds of the round game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6B, an image 37 (0) _{0 of the} fluctuation is displayed in the lower part of the center in the image display device 31. When the change of the first special symbol is suspended, the image 37 ₁ of the first suspension (the first order in the variation order) of the first special symbol is displayed on the left side of the image 37 (0) of the variation on the image display device 31. (1) The image 37 ₁ (2) of the second hold (the change order is the second hold), the image 37 ₁ (3) of the third hold (the change order is the third hold), and the fourth hold (the change) A maximum of four images 37 ₁ (4) in the order (fourth hold) are displayed.

When the change of the second special symbol is suspended, an image of the first suspension (the first order in the variation order) of the second special symbol is displayed on the right side of the image 37 (0) of the variation on the image display device 31. 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold A maximum of four images 37 ₂ (4) in the (fourth order of change) are displayed. Here, FIG. 6B shows only images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) for simplicity.

When the number of reserved displays on the first special symbol pending display 23 increases, the images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) according to the retained number after the increase are displayed. Appear. When the number of reserved displays on the second special symbol reserve display 24 increases, the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) according to the retained number after the increase is displayed. Appear.

Once the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) corresponding to the number of reserved displays on the first special symbol pending display 23 is displayed, one special symbol is displayed. Each time the change of the image is finished, the image 37 (0) of the change disappears, the image 37 ₁ (1) of the first reservation moves to the position of the fluctuation image 37 (0) of the change, and the images after the second reservation 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) move to the position to the right of each.

One image of the special symbol is displayed while the image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) corresponding to the number of suspended displays on the second special symbol suspension display 24 is displayed. Each time the change of the image is completed, the image 37 (0) of the change disappears, the first reserved image 37 ₂ (1) moves to the position of the variable image 37 (0) of the change, and the image after the second reservation 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) moves to the position to the left of each.

In the following description, the image _{37 (0)} 37 1 (1), ₃₇ 1 (2), 37 1 _(3), 37 1 (4), 37 _{2 (1),} 37 2 (2), ₃₇ 2 ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as “suspended display image 37”.

  Also, in the symbol fluctuation effect, the gaming machine 1 performs the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, the full rotation reach effect, the re-lottery effect, the first role based on the result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35. One or more of a plurality of types of effects including an object operation effect, a second role operation effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a step-up effect, a line operation effect, a roulette operation effect, a gauge operation effect, a timing operation effect, and a specific notice effect. A plurality of effects are selected, and the selected one or more effects are executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device. In the special gaming effect, the gaming machine 1 selects one or a plurality of effects among a plurality of types of effects including the promotion effect based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the operation of the effect button 35, and selects the selected effect. Alternatively, a plurality of effects are performed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device. The outline of each effect performed as a symbol variation effect or a special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 8A, a normal reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The normal reach effect may be executed at a predetermined time _tNR within the fluctuation period T of the special symbol. In the normal reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R enter a reach state in which the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped while the middle symbol 36C fluctuates.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the SP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. There may SP reach effect is performed, symbol variation with the establishment of reach (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "reach varying") is a time t _SP of late (after the establishment reach). The SP reach effect is not executed in the symbol variation that does not involve the establishment of the reach (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “normal variation”). SP reach production is a development production that evolves from normal reach production. In the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are separated at the left and right corners of the screen, and an animation character image of a plurality of characters is displayed at the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when developing to SP reach production is higher than when not developing to SP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the SPSP reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The SPSP reach effect may be executed at time _tSPSP at the end of reach fluctuation (after reach is established). In the normal fluctuation, the SPSP reach effect is not executed. The SPSP reach production is a development production that evolves from the normal reach production. In the SPSP reach effect, a left symbol 36L and a right symbol 36R are separated from each other at a left corner and a right corner of the screen, and a singing recording image of a plurality of characters is displayed at the center of the screen. The reliability of the jackpot when developing into the SPSP reach production is higher than when not developing into the SPSP reach production.

As shown in FIG. 8D, a full rotation reach effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The full-rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R fluctuate while keeping the same type of symbol combination. The full rotation reach effect may be executed at the time _tZKT at the end of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after reaching). The full rotation reach effect may be executed in the normal fluctuation and the reach fluctuation, or may be executed only in the reach fluctuation. The full-rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot-determining effects (the effect of notifying the effect before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination).

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed at time _tSCHU at the end of reach fluctuation (after reach is established). In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed. In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped (a slightly shaking display) in a combination that is not a unique combination (either “333” or “777”) per 16R probability change. Stop in the embodiment). Thereafter, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R fluctuate again for a short time, temporarily stop again with the same or different symbol combination as before the temporary stop, and stop the temporary stop when the special symbol is stopped. To maintain.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), when the winning has been achieved per 16R probability change, the symbol combinations at the time of the temporary stop before the re-change are “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”, “666”. , "888", or "999" ("222" in the example of FIG. 9A), and the symbol combination at the time of the temporary stop after the re-variation is either "333" or "777". (“777” in the example of FIG. 9A). The effect that the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after this re-change is either “333” or “777” is a fixed effect per 16R certain change (before the design symbol 36 stops at a unique combination per 16R certain change) Production).

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when a jackpot other than the 16R probability change is won, the symbol combinations at the temporary stop before and after the re-change are “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”. , "666", "888", and "999" ("222" in the example of FIG. 9B).

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the first accessory operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The first accessory operation effect is an effect of dropping the first movable accessory 330a in response to the operation of the operation button 35. The first accessory operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{AY0 to} time t _AY2 at the end of reach fluctuation (after reach is established). In the first role item operation effect, the notification condition is that a press operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and if the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, One movable role 330a is dropped, thereby reporting the jackpot determination result.

More specifically, in the first role item operation effect, at time _tAY0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time _tAY1 , Then, a guidance image (character image of “press!”) That prompts the operation of the effect button 35 appears. In the first _accessory operation effect, the period from the time t _AY1 to the time t _AY2 is set as an operation reception valid period, and a time marker (in the figure, a hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set as the period elapses. (Right end) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. When the end time _tAY2 of the operation acceptance valid period comes without performing the pressing operation, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time _tAY2 . The modes of notification of the operation result include the presence of a dropping of the accessory and the absence of the dropping of the accessory.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in an effect in which there is a dropping of the role, the first movable role 330a descends immediately after the pressing operation. The effect in which the first movable role 330a descends is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the effect before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination). If the first movable auditory 330a falls in the special symbol change display, then the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, in the effect without the dropping of the role, the first movable role 330 a does not descend regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), the first special effect operation specific notice effect may be executed at time _t'AY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the first special effect operation effect. The first role item operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35. In the first accessory operation specific notice effect, a movable accessory dejab image in which the first movable accessory 330a is displayed translucently appears.

As shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, a second character operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The second role operation effect is an effect of tilting the second movable role 330b, triggered by the operation of the effect button 35. The second accessory operation effect may be executed during a period from time t _{SY0 to} t _SY2 at the end of reach fluctuation (after reach is established). In the second role item operation effect, the notification condition is that a press operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and if the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, 2 The movable role 330b is tilted, thereby notifying the SP reach effect or the development to the SPSP reach effect.

More specifically, in the second role operation effect, at time t _SY0 , an image imitating the effect button 35 and an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation reception validity period of the effect button 35 appear, and at time t _SY1 . Then, a guidance image (character image of “press!”) That prompts the operation of the effect button 35 appears. In the second _accessory operation effect, the period from the end time t _SY1 to the time t _SY2 is set as the operation acceptance valid period, and the time marker (in the figure, the hatched area in the figure) Right) goes to the right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. When the end time t _SY2 of the operation acceptance valid period is reached without _{performing the} pressing operation, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t _SY2 . The modes of notification of the operation result include the presence of the accessory tilt and the absence of the accessory tilt.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, in the effect with the accessory tilting, the second movable auditorium 330b tilts immediately after the pressing operation. The effect in which the second movable role 330b is tilted is a development information effect (an effect that informs that it will evolve into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect before developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect). If the second movable role 330b is tilted in the special symbol change display, then the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, in the effect without tilting the role, the second movable role 330 b does not tilt regardless of the presence or absence of the pressing operation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the second _bonus item operation specific notice effect may be executed at time _t'SY1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second _bonus item operation effect. The second accessory operation specific announcement effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35. In the second bonus operation specific notice effect, a movable role dejab image in which the second movable role 330b is displayed translucently appears.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a), 12 (b), and 12 (c), a pseudo continuous effect may be executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The pseudo continuous production is a production in which a pseudo fluctuation composed of a temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the pseudo consecutive chance mode and subsequent re-variation display is repeated up to three times. The pseudo consecutive chances are “112”, “445”, “556”, “889”, and “991”. The first pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous production may be performed at time t _GJ1 at the beginning of the normal fluctuation or reach fluctuation (before reach is established). Pseudo variation the second time at time _{t GJ2} after time _{t GJ1,} pseudo variation of the third time at time _{t GJ3} after time _{t GJ2,} may be performed, respectively. The reliability of the jackpot in the pseudo continuous production increases as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases. The third pseudo fluctuation in the pseudo continuous production with three pseudo fluctuations is one of the jackpot determination effects (the effect of notifying the effect before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination). When the number of pseudo variations reaches three in the special symbol variation display, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, a step-up effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The step-up effect is a stage effect that reaches the stage specified as the final stage from each stage in the normal stage with the upper limit of 4 stages and a special stage that can proceed after passing the upper limit of the normal stage only when the jackpot is confirmed It is a production that develops. The step effect of the normal stage 1 in the step-up effect may be performed at the time t _SUP1 in the early to middle stage (before reaching reach) of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation. The normal stage 2 step effect is performed at time t _SUP2 after time t _SUP1 , the normal stage 3 step effect is performed at time t _SUP3 after time t _SUP2 , and the normal stage 4 step effect is _performed at time t _SUP2 . at time _{t SUP4} later than _SUP3, step rendition of special stage at time _{t SUPS} after time _{t SUP4,} it may be performed, respectively.

  In the step effect of each stage of the normal stage 1 to the special stage of the step-up effect, a photo image of a girl unique to each stage is superimposed on the photo image of the previous stage. There are three colors of frame of the photo image appearing in the step effect of each step of the step-up effect, namely, blue, green, and red. There is a development branch point between successive stages in the step-up effect, and at the development branch point, the frame color of the photo image is divided into a plurality of development destinations.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the relationship between the photo image and the frame color at each stage in the step-up effect and the jackpot reliability. As shown in FIG. 14, in the step-up effect, the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Also, in the case of a photo image at the same stage, the reliability of a jackpot is higher in a green frame than in a blue frame, and the reliability of a jackpot is higher in a red frame than in a green frame. In the special stage effect, the background color in the frame of the photo image of stage 4 is usually golden. The step effect in the special stage is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the effect before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination). In the special symbol change display, when the special stage of the step-up effect progresses, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 15A, a dialogue operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The line operation effect is an effect in which the line effect progresses according to the operation of the effect button 35. The line operation effect may be executed during a period from time t _{SR0 to} time t _SR2 in the early stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (before reaching reach). In the speech operation effect, the notification condition is that a press operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and an operation result is reported when the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. I do.

More specifically, in the dialogue operation effect, at a time t _SR0 , a balloon frame and a cycle display of a silhouette of the character A → a silhouette of the character B → a silhouette of the character C → a silhouette of the character D → a silhouette of the character A are repeated. A silhouette image appears. At time t _{SR <b> 1} , an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image (character image of “press!”) For prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. I do. In the dialogue operation effect, a period from time t _SR1 to time t _SR2 is set as an operation acceptance valid period, and a time marker (the right end of a hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set as the period elapses. Go right. If the pressing operation is performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the operation result is notified immediately after the pressing operation. Examples of the notification of the operation result include a case where the character A appears as a line speaker, a case where the character B appears as a line speaker, a case where the character C appears as a line speaker, and a case where the character D appears as a line speaker. is there. If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the speech operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in an effect in which the character A is a dialogue speaker, when a pressing operation is performed, the round display of the silhouette image is stopped and the image of the character A appears, and the character A is displayed in the balloon frame. Is displayed. In an effect in which the character B is a dialogue speaker, when a pressing operation is performed, the round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character B appears, and the dialogue of the character B is displayed in the balloon frame. In an effect in which the character C is a dialogue speaker, when a pressing operation is performed, the round display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character C appears, and the dialogue of the character C is displayed in the balloon frame. In an effect in which the character D is a dialogue speaker, when a depressing operation is performed, the loop display of the silhouette image is stopped, the image of the character D appears, and the dialogue of the character D is displayed in the balloon frame. Among the characters A, B, C and D, the jackpot reliability of the dialogue operation effect in which the character D is the dialogue speaker is higher than that of the dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B and C are the dialogue speakers. There is no big difference between the degrees. The dialogue operation effect in which the characters A, B, C, and D are the dialogue speakers is an effect called “buzzing effect”, which is an effect that is so small that the influence on the reliability of the jackpot can be ignored.

  However, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot lottery, the image of the premium character may appear with a very low probability when the display of the silhouette image is stopped. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the user before the effect symbol 36 stops in the jackpot combination). When the image of the premium character appears after the cycle display of the silhouette images of the characters A, B, C, and D in the special symbol change display, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are displayed. Stop display with big hit symbol combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15 (c), at the time t ′ _SRF before the operation of the effect button 35 in the line operation effect in which the image of the premium character is to appear, the line operation specific notice effect is executed. There are cases. The serif operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the serif operation effect. In the speech operation specific notice effect, a premium character dejab image showing the premium character in a semi-transparent manner appears in the balloon frame during the round display of the silhouette image.

As shown in FIG. 16A, a roulette operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The roulette operation effect is an effect in which the roulette effect progresses according to the operation of the effect button 35. The roulette operation effect may be executed during the period from the time t _{RL0 to the} time t _RL2 in the early stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (before the reach is established). In the roulette operation effect, the notification condition is that the press operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation result is notified when the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period. I do.

More specifically, in the roulette operation effect, at time _tRL0 , a roulette image that repeats a loop display of “!” → “Change” → “NEXT” → “SP” → “!” Appears, and at time _tRL1 . Then, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image (character image of “press!”) For prompting the operation of the effect button 35 appear. In the roulette operation effect, the period from the time t _RL1 to the time t _RL2 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is set as the period elapses. Go right. When the pressing operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation result is notified after the operation reception valid period elapses. The mode of notification of the operation result includes a mode in which the roulette roll is "!", A mode in which the result is "Change", a mode in which the result is "NEXT", and a mode in which the roulette is "SP". If the pressing operation is not performed within the operation acceptance valid period, the roulette operation effect ends without proceeding to the notification of the operation result.

  Here, “!” Indicates that it is unlikely to be a big hit. “Chance” indicates that a normal reach effect may be executed in the variable display. “NEXT” indicates that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous production may be executed in the variable display. “SP” indicates that there is a possibility that an SP reach effect may be executed in the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, in the effect in which the roulette roll is “!”, When the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at “!”. In the effect in which the result of the roulette is “Chance”, when the pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at “Chance”. In an effect in which the roulette roll is “NEXT”, when a pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at “NEXT”. In the effect in which the roulette roll is “SP”, when a pressing operation is performed, the roulette image stops at “SP”. Among the “!”, “Chance”, “NEXT”, and “SP”, the roulette operation effect where the roulette roll is “!” Is a jackpot reliability, and the roulette roll is “Chance”, “NEXT”, And “SP”, which is higher than the jackpot reliability of the roulette operation production, but there is no significant difference between the two. The roulette operation production in which “!”, “Chance”, “NEXT”, and “SP” are the roulette effects is a production called “buzzing”, which has a negligible effect on the reliability of the jackpot (cass production). ). However, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot lottery, the image of the premium character may appear with a very low probability when the roulette image is stopped from being displayed once. The effect in which the image of the premium character appears is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the user before the effect symbol 36 stops in the jackpot combination). When the image of the premium character appears after the round display of the roulette image in the special symbol change display, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16C, a roulette operation specific announcement effect is executed at time t ′ _RL1 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect in which the image of the premium character is to appear. There are cases. The roulette operation specific announcement effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the roulette operation effect. In the roulette operation specific announcement effect, a premium character dejab image in which the premium character is displayed in a semi-transparent manner appears to the right of the roulette image displayed in one cycle.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), and 17 (c), a gauge operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The gauge operation effect is an effect in which a stage effect (an effect of increasing the points of the points indicating the jackpot reliability) is developed in accordance with the operation of the operation button 35. The gauge operation effect may be executed during a period from time t _{GG0 to} t _GG5 in the middle stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after reaching). In the gauge operation effect, the notification condition is that the press operation of pressing the effect button 35 is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and if the press operation is performed within the operation reception valid period, the operation reception valid period Notify the operation result as the process progresses.

More specifically, in the gauge operation effect, a gauge image imitating a torchlight appears on the left side of the screen at time t _GG0 . The gauge image has 0 points at the lower end of the extension range in the gauge image, 10000 points at the upper end of the extension range in the gauge image, and points to which stage between 0 and 10000 (points of hatched portions in the figure). This indicates the degree of expectation of SP reach production and SPSP reach production depending on whether the upper side rises. There is a scale of “0” at the lower left of the extension range of the gauge image. There is a scale of "10000" at the upper left of the extension range of the gauge image. In the gauge operation effect, the period from time t _GG0 to time t _GG3 is the first half of the development period, and the gauge development amount increases.

In the gauge operation effect, at time t _GG3 , the gauge development amount once stops increasing, and an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the progress of the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and the operation of the effect button 35 are displayed. A prompting guidance image (a character image of “press!”) Appears. In the gauge operation effect, the period from time t _GG3 to time t _GG4 is set as the operation reception valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is _shifted to the _{right as} the period elapses. Proceed to. When the player presses the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period, or when the operation reception valid period ends at time t _GG4 , the progress of the gauge resumes. In the gauge operation effect, the period from the restart of the progress of the gauge to the time _{tGG5 is defined} as the latter half of the progress period, and the gauge progress amount increases. At time _tGG5 , the progress of the gauge stops, and the final score is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), an effect whose final score is 10,000 or more (10025 in the example of FIG. 17 (a)) evolves into an SP reach effect before it evolves into a SPSP reach effect. Production). When the final score of the gauge operation effect is 10,000 or more, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (b), the production in which the final score is 8000 or more (8275 in the example of FIG. 17 (a)) is performed before the development information production (SP reach production or SPSP reach production). The effect that informs that it will be developed into a reach effect or an SPSP reach effect). When the final score of the gauge operation effect is 8000 or more, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the production in which the final score is 3333 or 7777 is a 16R probability-change-performing effect (the effect of notifying the effect before the design symbol 36 stops in a unique combination per 16R probability-change). ). When the final score of the gauge operation effect becomes 3333 or 7777, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in a symbol combination per 16R probability change.

Further, as shown in FIG. _17D , at time t ′ _GG3 before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect that is to progress to the point acquisition stage of 8000 or more, the gauge operation specific announcement effect is provided. May be performed. The gauge operation specific notice effect is an effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect after the operation of the operation button 35 in the gauge operation effect. In the gauge operation specific announcement effect, a dejab image in which the final score (in the example of FIG. 17B, 10075) is displayed translucently appears to the right of the gauge during the progress of the gauge.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, a timing operation effect may be executed as a part of the symbol change effect. The timing operation effect is an effect that, when the timing operation of the effect button 35 is successful, notifies the presence or absence of the development to the advanced effect (SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect). The timing operation effect may be executed during the period from time t _{TM0 to} time t _TM5 in the middle stage of the normal fluctuation or the reach fluctuation (after reaching). In the timing operation production, a guidance image for prompting the operation of the production button 35 is displayed, the operation of the operation button 35 is received, and the pressing operation of pressing the operation button 35 at a predetermined timing is performed as a notification condition, When the pressing operation is performed at a predetermined timing, the operation progresses to the notification of the operation result.

More specifically, in the timing operation effect, at time _tTM0 , an image simulating the effect button 35 and a guide image prompting the operation of the effect button 35 are displayed at the lower center of the screen (the characters “PUSH TO Rhythm”). Image) appears. At time _tTM1 , a line extends from the image of the effect button 35 at the lower center to the upper left, and the first duplicate image of the effect button 35 appears before that. At time _tTM2 , the line extends to the upper right from the first duplicated image, and the second duplicated image appears before the line. At time _tTM3 , the line extends to the left from the second duplicate image, and the third duplicate image appears at the end of the line. At time _tTM4 , the line extends to the lower right from the third duplicated image, and the fourth duplicated image appears at the end of the line. At time _tTM5 , a line extends from the fourth duplicated image toward the image of the effect button 35 at the center of the screen, and a pentagon having the images of the five effect buttons 35 as vertices is completed.

After the disappearance of the guide image, the player makes the appearance timing t _TM1 of the first image of the effect button 35, the appearance timing t _{TM2 of} the second image, the appearance timing t _TM3 of the third image, and 4. The effect button 35 is pressed at the appearance timing _tTM4 of the second image. If the operation timing of the effect button 35 matches any of the appearance timings t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , and t _TM4 of the images of the first to fourth effect buttons 35, the single operation is successful. If the single operation succeeds, a character image of “GOOD” appears as an effect in an effect mode corresponding to the match between the operation timing and the appearance timing. If the operation timing of the performance button 35 is not met with any of the emergence timing _{t TM1, t TM2, t TM3} , t TM4 of the image of the performance button 35, the failure of a single operation. If the single operation fails, a character image of “miss” appears as an effect in an effect mode corresponding to the mismatch between the operation timing and the appearance timing. Operation timing of pressing across multiple performance button 35 becomes an operation completion fitted with all first fourth of performance button 35 image from the appearance timing _{t TM1, t TM2, t TM3} , t TM4, more A character image of “EXCELLENT” appears as an effect in an effect mode according to the operation timing of the first operation matching all of the appearance timings.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the character image of “EXCELLENT” appears, the character image of “SP” may appear after the completion of the pentagon. The effect in which the character image of “SP” appears is a development information effect (an effect that informs that it will develop into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect before developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect). When the character image of “SP” appears in the special symbol change display, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is thereafter executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 (a), 20 (a), and 20 (b), a back button timing operation effect (hereinafter referred to as “back button operation effect”) is executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. In some cases. The back button operation effect is an effect in which, when the back button operation of the effect button 35 is successful, the presence or absence of a jackpot winning is notified.

The back button operation effects include a reach back button operation effect and a step-up back button operation effect. The reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19A) may be executed during a period before and after the reach establishment time _tNR in the reach fluctuation in which the special symbol stops at the symbol indicating the big hit. It is. The step-up back button operation effect may be executed because the special symbol normally stops at the symbol indicating the big hit after passing through the step-up effect of the normal stage 4 or the normal stage within the normal variation or the reach variation. from 2 of time _{t SU2} is a period of up to time _{t SU4} of normal stage 4.

In the reach back button operation effect, an operation on the operation button 35 is received without displaying a guide image for prompting an operation on the effect button 35, and a notification that the operation button 35 is pressed in accordance with the reach establishment timing _tNR is performed. As a condition, when the pressing operation is performed in accordance with the reach establishment timing _tNR , the operation progresses to the notification of the operation result. In more detail, Reach back button operation performance, operation timing of the performance button 35 is if someone with the timing t _NR of the establishment of reach, the success of the back button operation. When the back button operation is successful, the sound output device 32 outputs a back button operation success notification sound (“transcendence cute”) as an effect of an effect mode corresponding to the timing of operation of the operation button 35 matching the reach establishment timing _tNR. Is output). The effect in which the back button operation success sound is output is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the effect before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination). When the back button operation success sound is output in the special symbol change display, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

In the step-up back button operation effect, an operation on the operation button 35 is received without displaying a guide image for prompting an operation on the effect button 35, and the operation button 35 is set at four back button operation determination timings _tUR1 in the step-up effect. , triggered _{by t UR2, t UR3, t UR4} the notification condition that the repeated pressing operation is performed to match the, back button operation determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , battered operation tailored to _{t UR4} is performed As a result, the operation result is notified. In more detail, the step-up back button operation effect, if someone operation timings of a plurality of times of operation of the performance button 35 and all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4, successful back button operation Becomes Successful back button operation, the operation timing determination timing _t UR1 of the operation button _35, t _UR2, t _UR3, as effect of the representation embodiment according to fit with all _{t UR4,} back button operation on the performance symbols 36 The success image (the character image of "congratulations") is displayed. The effect in which the back button operation success image is displayed is one of the jackpot determination effects (effects informing the user before the effect symbol 36 stops at the jackpot combination). When the successful back button operation image is displayed in the special symbol change display, finally, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), a promotion effect may be executed as a part of a special game effect during a special game. The promotion effect is stopped at the symbol combination of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999" for the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. At the beginning of the execution of the special game, the player does not specify which jackpot has been won during the special game without explicitly indicating whether the player has won the 8R probability change or the 8R regular hit. This is a directing effect. The promotion effect is executed during a period from time t _{SKK to} t _RDE after the start time t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the promotion effect, a guidance image prompting a continuous hit operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 35 is displayed, an operation on the operation button 35 is received, and a continuous hit operation is performed within the operation reception valid period of the effect button 35 as a notification condition. When the number of consecutive hits within the operation acceptance valid period reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30), the operation result is notified.

More specifically, in the promotion effect, at time t _SKK , a character image of “Charge the gauge and get a certain change” appears at the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image indicating the progress of the continuous hit operation reception valid period of the effect button 35, and a guide image (““ Character image). In the gauge image, the left end of the development range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the development range of the gauge image is MAX, and the probability of the probability of a large hit is indicated by the amount of progress between MIN and MAX.

In the promotion effect, the period from time t _RDS to time t _RDE is set as the operation acceptance valid period, and the time marker (the right end of the hatched area in the figure) in the indicator image is shifted to the right along with the elapse of this period. move on. When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 35 within the operation acceptance valid period, the progress amount in the gauge image advances rightward in accordance with the continuous hit. When the number of continuous hits of the effect button 35 within the operation reception valid period reaches 30 times, the operation result is notified when the number of continuous hits reaches the predetermined number. If the end time t _RDE of the operation acceptance effective period reaches the end time t _RDE without the number of repeated hits reaching 30, the operation result is _{notified at} the end time t _RDE . The mode of notification of the operation result includes success of promotion and failure of promotion.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in an effect of successful promotion, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches “MAX”, and character images of “success” and “congratulations on change” are displayed. In the special game, when an effect of successful promotion is executed, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the effect of the promotion failure, the amount of progress of the gauge stops before “MAX”, and a character image of “failure” is displayed. In a special game, when an effect of promotion failure is executed, the game state after the end of the special game becomes a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state.

  In addition, when a special symbol change is suspended due to a winning start of the first starting port 14 or the second starting port 15, the gaming machine 1 may execute a look-ahead reserved display change effect. The look-ahead hold display change effect is an effect that suggests a possibility of a jackpot in the hold due to a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), in the look-ahead reservation display change effect, a special symbol change is suspended due to the start winning, and the suspension (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)) In the example of the above, in the case where the look-ahead hold display change effect with the change corresponding to the third change of the first special symbol) as the final change is executed, the time t immediately after the start of each change from the start winning to the final change _HH (in the example of FIGS. 22A and 22B, the time t _HH immediately after the start of the change two times before the final change, the time t _H immediately after the start of the change immediately before the final change, t _HH (2) _{At HH} (1), time t _HH (0) immediately after the start of the final change, the display mode of the hold display image 37 corresponding to the final change changes to any of blue, green, and red. In the look-ahead hold display change effect, the reliability of the jackpot increases in the order of blue <green <red.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power board 170, a game information output terminal board 30, a power plug 171 and a power switch (not shown) ), A RAM clear switch (not shown), and the like. When a start operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130, and the boards 110, 120, and 130 are started.

  The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

  The input ports of the main control board 110 include a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detecting switch 12a, a gate detecting switch 13a, a first starting opening detecting switch 14a, a second starting opening detecting switch 15a, and a first winning opening detecting switch. 16a, a second winning opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

  The output ports of the main control board 110 include a payout control board 130, a starting opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first winning opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second winning opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, and a second special The symbol display device 21, the ordinary symbol display device 22, the first special symbol reservation display 23, the second special symbol reservation display 24, the ordinary symbol reservation display 25, and the game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal plate 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.

  The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b based on an input signal from each detection switch and a timer, and performs arithmetic processing. In addition, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the display devices 23 to 25, and transmits a command to another board according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and a game is ready to be played, a jackpot random number value (a random number value in a random number range of 0 to 599), Special symbol random number (random number in the range of 0 to 99), reach determination random number (random number in the range of 0 to 99), special figure variation random number (random value in the range of 0 to 99) , While updating various random values including the normal symbol random value (a random number in the random number range of 0 to 65535) within each random number range, the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the ordinary symbol, and the game such as the special game. Control progress.

  The main ROM 110b of the main control board 110 stores data such as a game control program. The main ROM 110b has a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a hit determination table for the ordinary symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a preliminary determination table, a special game control table, a special winning opening. Various tables such as an open / close control table and a special game end setting table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. In the main RAM 110c, a special symbol hold storage area, a special figure special power processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a normal symbol normal power process data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, a number of rounds (R ) Storage area, large winning opening ball entry number (C) storage area, high-probability game flag storage area, time saving game flag storage area, game state buffer, first special symbol reserved number counter, second special symbol reserved number counter, ordinary Various types such as symbol holding number counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, ordinary symbol time counter, auxiliary game timer counter, transmission data storage area for effects, etc. A storage area is provided. Here, at the time of power failure, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is backed up by a backup power supply after adding a checksum, and at the time of power restoration, the data backed up by the backup power supply is restored through a data check by the checksum. I am getting it.

  The power supply board 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and supplies a power cutoff detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become a predetermined value or less to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120. The power supply board 170 has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor. The power supply board 170 sets the disconnection detection signal to a high level while the power supply voltage is higher than a predetermined value, and sets the disconnection detection signal to a low level when the power supply voltage becomes lower than the predetermined value.

  The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives the command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, an image display executed in the image display device 31, a sound output executed in the audio output device 32, a drive for effect. The operation performed in the devices 33a and 33b or the flicker performed in the lighting device for staging 34 is controlled. Describing in more detail, the effect control board 120 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120a, a sub ROM 120b, a sub RAM 120c, and an RTC 120d. The RTC 120d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120a. The RTC 120d operates with the supplied power when the gaming machine 1 is supplied with power, and operates with the power of the backup power supply mounted on the power supply board 170 when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  The sub CPU 120a reads out a program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110 and an input signal from the timer, performs an arithmetic process, and, based on the process, outputs a corresponding command to a ramp. The data is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. When the activation operation is performed, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process, and after the initialization process is completed and the game is ready to be played, the effect random number values 1 to 25 (each having a random number range of 0 to 99). (25 kinds of random number values having the following) within each of the random number ranges, while controlling the effect according to the progress of the game. Here, the effect random number values 1 to 25 are configured such that the same random number value is not obtained at the same time.

  The sub-ROM 120b of the effect control board 120 stores data such as effect control programs. Various tables such as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table are stored in the sub ROM 120b. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as an effect information storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a symbol fluctuation effect pattern storage area, a game state storage area, and an effect pattern storage area.

  The payout control board 130 controls payout of game balls. The payout control board 130 is connected to the main control board 110 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads out the program stored in the payout ROM based on the input signals from the payout ball counting switch 132 and the timer, performs an arithmetic process, and sends a corresponding command to the main control board 110 based on the process. Send. An output side of the payout control board 130 is connected to a payout motor 131 of a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage section of the game balls. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110 to perform arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out predetermined game balls. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area for data during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

  The lamp control board 140 controls the effect driving devices 33a and 33b and the effect lighting device. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device. The lamp control board 140 controls energization of drive sources such as solenoids and motors for operating the effect drive devices 33a and 33b based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, and turns on light in the effect lighting device 34. Control and drive control of the motor for changing the light irradiation direction are performed.

  The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, and a sound DSP (not shown). The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When a command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU generates a control signal according to the content of the command and outputs the control signal to the VDP and the audio DSP, thereby controlling the operations of the VDP and the audio DSP.

  The VDP of the image control board 150 includes an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating an image, a drawing engine for executing image drawing processing, and an output for outputting an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31. Circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in a frame buffer using material data stored in the image ROM based on a control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

  The sound DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to a sound ROM for storing various sound data related to music, sound, sound effects, and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the sound DSP. The sound DSP reads sound data corresponding to a control signal from the CPU from the sound ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and amplifies a sound signal obtained by the data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU. Then, the amplified sound signal is output to the sound output device 32.

Next, an operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by a start operation and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 23, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a turns on / off the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back of the gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on, and saves the main CPU 110a in the main RAM 110c in the power-off monitoring process (S20) at the last power-off. Based on the back-up information and the contents of the checksum that have been backed up, it is determined whether or not data recovery is necessary. If it is determined that recovery is not required, the main RAM 110c is cleared and recovery is determined to be required. In this case, the data in the main RAM 110c is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power-off monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off has occurred, the firing mechanism (the touch sensor 3a, the firing volume 3b, the firing solenoid 4a, And stopping the firing of the game ball by the ball feed solenoid 4b), clearing the output port, stopping the payout of the game ball by the payout device, creating and storing the checksum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and information on the occurrence of power interruption. After performing a series of the processing of setting, the access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power-off.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a game random value update process (S30). In the game random value update process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random value and the special figure change random value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (S40). In the initial random value updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random value, the ordinary symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of steps S20 to S40. In addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes a timer interrupt process each time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 executes a timer interrupt process every 4 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 24, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that time to the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs a time control process (S110). The time control process is a process of updating a counter used for counting various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a decrements the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c by one.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a random number update process (S120). In the random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the ordinary symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. .

  After execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random value update process (S130). In the initial random value updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random value, the ordinary symbol initial random value, and the special symbol initial random value.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detecting switch 12a, a first winning opening detecting switch 16a, a second winning opening detecting switch 17a, a first starting opening detecting switch 14a, a second starting opening detecting switch 15a, It is determined whether or not an input has been made to various switches of the gate detection switch 13a. If an input has been made, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special power control process (S300). In the special figure special power control processing, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the special symbol storage determination processing (the special figure special power processing). Data = 0), special symbol variation processing (special special processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (special special processing data = 2), big hit game processing (special One of the five processes of the figure special power processing data = 3) and the jackpot game end processing (the processing of special figure special power processing data = 4) is selected and executed. The details of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs an ordinary power control process (S400). In the ordinary figure ordinary power control processing, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the ordinary figure ordinary electric power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, and performs the ordinary symbol storage determination processing (the ordinary figure ordinary A process when the general-purpose process data = 0, a normal symbol variation process (a process when the general-purpose process data = 1), a normal symbol stop process (a process when the general-purpose process data = 2), And one of the four processes of the auxiliary game process (the process when the general-purpose general-purpose process data = 3) is selected and executed. Details of the procedure of the general-purpose power control process will be described later.

  After the execution of step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening prize ball counter, and the second starting opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of game balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. Upon receiving the payout number designation command, the payout control board 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the game balls.

  After the execution of step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a data generation process (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a outputs the external output data, the starting opening / closing solenoid data, the first winning opening / closing solenoid data, the second winning opening / closing solenoid data, the special symbol display device data, and the ordinary symbol display device data. Generate.

  After the execution of step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process (S700). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs the signals of the external output data, the starting opening / closing solenoid data, the first winning opening / closing solenoid data, and the second winning opening / closing solenoid data generated in the data generation process of step S600. Perform port output processing to be performed. In addition, in order to turn on each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the ordinary symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data created in the data generation process of S600 and the ordinary symbol display are used. A display device output process for outputting display device data is performed. Further, a command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

  After execution of step S700, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S800).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating details of the input control process. In FIG. 25, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 12a. If there is no input of the detection signal, the process proceeds to the next step S220. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c and updated.

  After execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the special winning opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. The main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S230 if no detection signal is input from any of the first special winning opening detection switch 16a and the second special winning opening detection switch 17a. When a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 16a or the second special winning opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the special winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area in the main RAM 110c is updated by adding +1.

  After the execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process (S230). In the first starting port detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the first start-up opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S240. When a detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a, the prize ball counter is updated, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol holding number (U1) is less than 4, and the first special symbol holding is performed. Updating the first special symbol holding number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, storing a random number value in the special symbol holding storage area, preliminarily determining a jackpot lottery, and specifying a start winning prize according to the determination result A series of processes such as a set of commands, a set of special symbol holding number designation commands according to the first special symbol holding number (U1), and the like are performed. The details of the procedure of the first starting port detection switch input processing will be described later.

  After the execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port detection switch input process (S240). In the second starting port detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second starting port detection switch 15a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S250. When a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 15a, the prize ball counter is updated, a determination is made as to whether or not the second special symbol holding number (U2) is less than 4, and the second special symbol holding is performed. Updating the second special symbol holding number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, storing a random number value in the special symbol holding storage area, preliminarily determining a jackpot lottery, and specifying a start winning prize according to the determination result A series of processes, such as a command set, a special symbol reserved number designation command according to the reserved number (U2) in the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the like are performed. The procedure of the second starting port detection switch input processing and the procedure of the first starting port detection switch input processing are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 13a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process. When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Also, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter for counting the ordinary symbol holding number (G) is less than 4. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is updated by adding +1 and the ordinary symbol random value is acquired. It is stored in the symbol hold storage area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting port detection switch input processing. In FIG. 26, when the detection signal is input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal has not been input from the first starting port detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting port detection switch input processing ends.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a updates the starting opening prize ball counter by adding a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting opening prize ball counter (S230-2). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter for counting the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

  When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the first start-up opening detection switch input process this time. When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is updated by adding +1 (S230-4).

  After the execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot random number value, and stores the data not stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol holding storage area of the special symbol holding storage area and the most significant number. The small storage unit is set as a data storage destination, and the obtained jackpot random number value is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination (S230-5).

  FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the special symbol holding storage area includes a 0th storage unit corresponding to the change, a first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the holding of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol holding storage area. It has a second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to holding. Each of the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area is a first memory corresponding to the first holding, a second memory corresponding to the second holding, and a third memory corresponding to the third holding. And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol holding storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for special figure change. It has become.

  After the execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol random value, and stores the acquired special symbol random value in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol holding storage area (S230-6). .

  After execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random number and the reach determination random number, and stores the acquired special figure variation random number and the reach determination random number in the first special symbol holding storage area. (S230-7).

  After execution of step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs a preliminary determination process (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table of the main ROM 110b, and sets the flag in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time reduction game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S230-8 (when the start condition is satisfied). And the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure change random number stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7. Based on this combination, the winning information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a preliminary determination table for determining the result of the jackpot lottery in advance. The prior determination table includes a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a game state (a time saving game state or a non-time saving game state), a reach determination random value, a special figure change random number, a winning information, and a start winning designation command. The set refers to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied, and refers to when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. And are stored separately.

  After execution of step S230-8, the main CPU 110a generates a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning information determined in the preliminary determination processing of step S230-8, and sets the start winning designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. (S230-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter, generates a special symbol reservation number designation command indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and designates this special symbol reservation number designation. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S230-10).

  The start winning designation command and the special symbol reservation number designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol, based on the description content of the start winning designation command, and designates the determined content of the effect. The command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Here, the procedure of the second start-up opening detection switch input processing (S240) is such that the reference number of the reserved number in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol reserved number counter, and steps S230-5 to S230. -7, the storage destination of the random value is the second special symbol storage area, the reference of the random value in step S230-8 is the second special symbol storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10. Is the same as that of the first start-up opening detection switch input processing (S230) except that the reference destination is the second special symbol reservation number counter.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure special power control process. In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data (S301). In the subsequent step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special power processing data, and if the special figure special power processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310). If the special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step S320), and if the special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330), and the special power processing data = If it is 3, the process proceeds to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the process proceeds to the jackpot game end process (step S350).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol storage determination process. In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and if the special symbol time counter is not 0, determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed, and sets the special symbol time counter to 0. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed. When the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a terminates the current special symbol storage determination process. If the special symbol is not being changed (S310-1: No), the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a model that uses the suspension of the change of the second special symbol in preference to the suspension of the change of the first special symbol. In these types of gaming machines, prior determination is not performed during the time-saving gaming state even if the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied.

  When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter and performs the first special symbol reservation. It is determined whether the number of symbol reservations (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4).

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a ends the special symbol storage determination process of this time.

  When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter by -1 (S310-). 6). After executing step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs a storage area shift process (S310-7). In this storage area shift processing, the main CPU 110a determines which one of the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area corresponds to the symbol to which the number of holdings has been subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed as a processing target.

  When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-3, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol reservation storage area for each one. The data is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area is written to the 0th storage unit that is the determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers (the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation random number) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are erased. Is done.

  When the main CPU 110a has subtracted the count value (U1) of the first special symbol reservation number counter in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a stores the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random numbers (the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation random number) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are erased. Is done.

  After execution of step S310-7, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol reservation number designation command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2). The special symbol reservation number designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S310-8).

  After the execution of step S310-8, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In the jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines a lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition, and determines the type of the jackpot if the jackpot is determined. Is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a design specification command for the loss is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  More specifically, in the big hit determination process, as shown in an example of FIG. 31 (a flowchart showing the details of the big hit determination process), the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result of the big hit lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition. Is a jackpot or a loss (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, determines whether or not a flag has been set in the high-probability game flag storage area at the time of execution of step S311-1, and determines whether or not the flag has been set to 0 in step S310-7. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the section.

  FIG. 32A is a diagram showing the jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 32A, in the jackpot lottery determination table, a set of a jackpot random number value and a lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery is referred to in the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state. Are stored separately for those that are referred to at the time of.

  Comparing the number of jackpot random numbers that make a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state with the number of jackpot random numbers that make the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state in the jackpot lottery determination table, the jackpot random number value in the low-probability gaming state becomes “7 And "8", whereas the jackpot random number values in the high-probability gaming state are 20 from "7" to "26". The random number range of the jackpot random value is 0 to 598. Therefore, the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is 2/599 (= 1 / 299.5), and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is increased by 10 times to 20/599 (= 1 / 29.9).

  When the determination result in step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2, and when the determination result in step S311-1 is a loss (S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot symbol determination process. In the big hit symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the big hit symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the special symbol random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8, stops the fluctuation stop symbol. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates a two-digit number ("00" to "07") corresponding to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the change.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing a big hit symbol determination table. In the jackpot symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol random number, a type of special symbol (type of jackpot), stop symbol data, and a symbol designating command is a condition for starting the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. Are stored when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

  The effect symbol designating command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed after the change.

  The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in this step S311-2 is used when determining the big hit symbol in the special symbol stop process, when determining the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game process, and in the big hit game end process. It is referred to when determining the gaming state. Details will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for the big hit corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-short game flag storage area, and obtains the game state information indicating the obtained game state. It is stored in the gaming state buffer (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high-probability game flag and the time saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets the data of “00H” as the game state information in the game state buffer. When the high-probability game flag is set and the time-saving game flag is not set, data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. When the high-probability game flag is not set and the time-saving game flag is set, the data of "02H" is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. When both the high-probability game flag and the time reduction game flag are set, the data of “03H” is set in the game state buffer as the game state information.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs a lost symbol determination process. In the losing symbol determination processing, the main CPU 110a refers to the losing symbol determination table in the main ROM 110b to determine the stop symbol data of the stop symbol of the loss, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

  FIG. 33 (b) is a diagram showing a loss symbol determination table. In the losing symbol determination table, a set of a special symbol type, stop symbol data, and a symbol designating command is referred to when a first special symbol display condition in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and a second symbol. The second special symbol display device 21 stores the second special symbol separately for reference when the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for a loss corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

  Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table in the main ROM 110b, and determines the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the big hit lottery in step S311-1 and the time saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of this step S312. Presence / absence of a flag, the number (U2) or (U1) of updates to be held in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random number stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, and the reach determination random number , And the combination of the special figure variation random numbers, the variation pattern of the variation is determined.

  There are two types of variation pattern determination tables, one that refers when the first special symbol fluctuates and one that refers when the second special symbol fluctuates. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern determination table referred to when the first special symbol varies. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern determination table referred to when the second special symbol varies.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the special symbol type (big hit type), the game state (time saving game state or non-time saving game state), the number of holds, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for special figure change, A set of the type of the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation start command is stored. The change start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the change pattern.

  In the special pattern change pattern determination table, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, a change pattern with a long change time is easily selected. For example, in the variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the options of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) are variation pattern 11, variation pattern 12, variation pattern 13, variation pattern 15, variation pattern There are seven types of patterns 16 and variation patterns 17.

  The fluctuation pattern 11 develops into an SP reach effect when there is no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0), and the fluctuation time is T1. The fluctuation pattern 12 develops into SP reach production through one pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T2 (T2> T1). The fluctuation pattern 13 develops into an SP reach production through two pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T3 (T3> T2).

  The fluctuation pattern 14 develops into an SPSP reach effect when there is no pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0), and the fluctuation time is T4 (T4> T3). The fluctuation pattern 15 develops into a SPSP reach production through one pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T5 (T5> T4). The fluctuation pattern 16 develops into an SPSP reach production through two pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T6 (T6> T5).

  The fluctuation pattern 17 develops into a full rotation reach effect through three pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T7. Of these, the magnitude relationship of the six types of selectivity excluding the variation pattern 17 which becomes the jackpot determination effect is as follows: variation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 <variation pattern 15 <variation pattern 16 I have.

  In the special symbol change pattern determination table, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, it is difficult to select a change pattern having a long change time. For example, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34, the variation corresponding to the combination of the special symbol 0 (losing), the non-time saving game state, and the reach (the reach determination random value is “70 to 99”) There are seven types of pattern choices: variation pattern 9, variation pattern 1, variation pattern 2, variation pattern 3, variation pattern 4, variation pattern 5, and variation pattern 6.

  The fluctuation pattern 9 is lost without developing after the normal reach effect, and the fluctuation time is T9 (T9 <T1).

  The fluctuation pattern 1 develops into an SP reach effect when there is no pseudo continuous effect (the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0), and the fluctuation time is T1. The fluctuation pattern 2 develops into an SP reach production through one pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T2. The fluctuation pattern 3 develops into an SP reach production through two pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T3.

  The fluctuation pattern 4 develops into an SPSP reach production without pseudo continuous production (the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0), and the fluctuation time is T4. The fluctuation pattern 5 develops into a SPSP reach production through one pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T5. The fluctuation pattern 6 develops into a SPSP reach production through two pseudo fluctuations of the pseudo continuous production, and the fluctuation time is T6.

  The magnitude relation of these seven types of selectivity is as follows: fluctuation pattern 9 <fluctuation pattern 1 <fluctuation pattern 2 <fluctuation pattern 3 <fluctuation pattern 4 <fluctuation pattern 5 <fluctuation pattern 6

  Also, comparing the change pattern determination table of the special symbol with the above-described pre-determination table (FIG. 28), the pre-determination table shows that the number of pending changes (U1) of the first special symbol and the The corresponding data in the table can be searched without referring to the number of pending changes (U2). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table does not refer to the number of fluctuations reserved for the first special symbol (U1) or the number of fluctuations reserved for the second special symbol (U2). As long as the corresponding data in the table can not be searched. For this reason, in the advance determination table, it is possible to determine the type of reach, but not to determine “normal fluctuation” and “short fluctuation”.

  In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a generates a change start command corresponding to the change pattern determined in step S312, and sets the change start command in the effect transmission data storage area (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the current game state based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time saving game flag storage area, and generates a game state designation command corresponding to the determined game state, This game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S314).

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol (S315). More specifically, the main CPU 110a stores, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform a variable display (LED blinking) of the special symbol. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special power processing data = 1 (S317), and ends the current special symbol storage determination processing. In the special figure special power control processing thereafter, the processing shifts to the special symbol change processing in step S302, and the special symbol change processing is performed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. If not, it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2. If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol fluctuation process is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the change display of the special symbol. More specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S315 and displays the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 on the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device. (2) Stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 21 is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counters) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is decremented every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data (S320-5), and terminates the current special symbol change processing. In the special figure special power control processing thereafter, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing in step S302, and the special symbol stop processing is performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol stop processing. In FIG. 37, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed. If it is not 0, it is determined that the special symbol stop time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the special symbol stop time has elapsed (S330-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S330-2. If it is determined that the special symbol stop time has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. In this time-saving game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a checks whether or not the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area. If the time saving game flag is not set in the time saving game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to the next step S330-3. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the number of time savings (J) in the number of time savings (J) storage area is updated by −1, and the updated time savings number (J) is 0. Determine whether or not. As a result, if the number of time savings (J) is 0, the time savings game flag set in the time savings game flag storage area is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next step S330-3. If the number of time savings (J) is not “0”, the process proceeds to the next step S330-3 with the time savings game flag set in the time savings game flag storage area.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. In the high-probability game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a checks whether a high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the process directly proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game count (X) in the high-probability game count (X) storage area is updated by −1, and the updated high probability game count is updated. It is determined whether the number of games (X) is 0 or not. As a result, when the high-probability game frequency (X) is 0, the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the high-probability game count (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4 with the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time reduction game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the determined game state. Generated and set this gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped symbol data in the stopped symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lost one (S330-5). When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric process data (S330-6), and stops the special symbol this time. The process ends. In the subsequent special figure special power control processing, the process proceeds to the special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

  When the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state, the number of high-probability games (X), and the number of reductions in time (J) at that time (S330-11). More specifically, when the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the high-probability game flag storage area and the high-probability game count (X) storage area. . When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data in the time saving game flag storage area and the number of time savings (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the 16R winning large winning opening opening / closing control table, The winning destination opening / closing control table and the 2R winning special winning opening / closing control table are determined as reference targets.

  FIG. 38 is a view showing a special game control table. FIG. 39 (a) is a diagram showing a 16R winning large winning opening opening / closing control table. FIG. 39B is a diagram showing an 8R winning big winning opening opening / closing control table. FIG. 39 (c) is a diagram showing a 2R winning big winning opening opening / closing control table.

  In the special game control table, sets of stop symbol data, opening time, table number of the reference winning opening / closing control table, and ending time are stored for each type of big hit. Here, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 16R is 01, the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 8R is 02, and the table number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table for 2R is 03.

  The 16R-per-winning winning opening / closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to 16th rounds per 16R and the type of the winning opening to be opened. The 8R-win special winning opening opening / closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to eighth rounds per 8R and the type of the special winning opening to be opened. In the 2R winning special winning opening opening / closing control table, data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round and the second round per 2R, and the type of the winning winning opening to be opened are stored.

  The main CPU 110a determines the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot, and transmits the opening designation command to the production transmission data. It is set in the storage area (S330-13).

  The main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets the start interval time in the special symbol time counter (S330-14). ), The special symbol stop processing of this time is ended. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process proceeds to the big hit game process in step S302, and the big hit game process is performed.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game process. In FIG. 39, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening is currently being performed (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area, and if the number of rounds (R) is 0, determines that the opening is in progress, and determines the number of rounds (R). If it is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not being performed. When the main CPU 110a is opening (S340-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not being performed (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop process, and if the special symbol time counter is 0, determines that the start interval time has elapsed, and If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-3. When it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-2: No), the present big hit game process is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, no operation has been performed yet, and the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area is zero. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in step S340-3 is one.

  After executing step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this special winning opening opening process, in order to open the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b, the first special winning opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening / closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data to be activated. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12 to determine the opening time of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R). The opening time is set in a special game timer counter.

  After executing Step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a round start command transmission determination process (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command corresponding to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and sets the round start command in the effect transmission data storage area. This ends the big hit game processing.

  In step S340-6, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. When it is determined that the ending is not being performed (S340-6: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is being performed (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is closed (S340-7). Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the energization data (the energization data for energizing the first special winning opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening / closing solenoid 17c) is not set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. When it is determined that the winning opening is closed, and when the energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the winning opening is not closed. When the special winning opening is closed (S340-7: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-8. When the special winning opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set in a special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. When determining that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to the special winning opening opening process of step S340-4, and performs the special winning opening opening process and the subsequent round start command transmission determining process (S340). -5) is performed, and the current jackpot game process ends. When determining that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current big hit game process.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening condition of the special winning opening has been satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a opens when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the special winning opening number of balls (C) storage area reaches a specified number (9) or when the opening time elapses. It is determined that the termination condition has been satisfied. In addition, the main CPU 110a determines that the number (C) of winning holes in the special winning opening (C) storage area has not reached the specified number (9) and that the opening time has not elapsed. In this case, it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition has been satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10. If it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the current big hit game process ends.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first special winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second special winning opening opening / closing door 17b so as to close the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid. The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and determines the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 based on the current round number (R). The closing time is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening is closed.

  After execution of step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a executes one round game when the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area reaches the specified number (9). It is determined that the process has been completed. Further, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area does not reach the specified number (9). It is determined that it has not been done. When determining that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round game has not been completed (S340-11: No), the current big hit game process is terminated.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the number of winning balls (C) in the special winning opening (C) storage area to zero.

  After execution of step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines that the number of rounds (R) in the number-of-rounds (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, the final number of the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12). (The number of rounds) (S340-13).

  When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) is not the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a updates the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area by +1 (S340). -14), the big hit game process ends.

  When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340-). 15).

  After the execution of step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of the jackpot based on the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in the above step S330-12, and generates an ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot, The ending designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S340-16).

  After execution of step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines an end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of the jackpot, and sets the end interval time in a special game timer counter (S340-17).

  After execution of step S340-17, or when it is determined that the ending is being performed in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340-). 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and if the special game timer counter is 0, determines that the end interval time has elapsed. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When determining that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current big hit game process.

  When determining that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data (S340-19), and ends the current special symbol change processing. In the special figure special power control process thereafter, the process proceeds to the big hit game end process in step S302, and the big hit game end process is performed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game end processing. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

  After execution of step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process (S350-2). In the high-probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b and, based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, sets the high probability at the end of the special game. The necessity of setting the game flag is determined.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a special game end time setting table. In the special game end setting table, stop symbol data, data indicating the storage content of the game state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time saving game state, data indicating the number of time saving games, data indicating the necessity of the high probability state, And a set of data indicating the number of high-probability games.

  Specifically, in step S350-1, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", a high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. If it is other than "03,07", the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process (S350-3). In the high-probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stopped symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, at the time of the end of the special game, X) The number of remaining fluctuations (X) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-2, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", 10000 times is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area, If it is other than "03, 07", 0 is set in the number-of-games (X) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process (S350-4). In the time-saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end time setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time-saving game flag at the time of ending the special game. Is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-3, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", a time reduction game flag is set in the time reduction game flag storage area.

  After the execution of step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs a number-of-time-savings setting process (S350-5). In the time-saving number setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, at the end of the special game, the number of games (J). The number of remaining fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in this step S350-4, if the stopped symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is “01 to 02, 04 to 06”, 10000 times is set in the number of games (J) storage area. If it is other than "03, 07", 100 is set in the number-of-games (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a obtains the current game state based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-short game flag storage area, and specifies the game state corresponding to the current game state. A command is generated, and this game state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S350-6).

  After execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the special figure special power processing data (S350-7), and ends the big hit game end processing. In the subsequent special figure special power control processing, the process proceeds to the special symbol storage determination processing in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination processing is performed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the general-purpose power control process. In FIG. 43, the main CPU 110a loads general-purpose general-purpose processing data (S401). In the subsequent step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special figure special power processing data, and if the general figure general processing data = 0, shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination processing. If the data = 1, the process is shifted to the normal symbol variation process. If the general data process data = 2, the process is shifted to the normal symbol stop process. If the general data process data = 3, the process is the auxiliary game process. Transfer processing.

  The outline of the ordinary symbol storage determination process, the ordinary symbol variation process, the ordinary symbol stop process, and the auxiliary game process is as follows. In the ordinary symbol storage determination process (the process of the ordinary symbol ordinary power process data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol pending number counter is 1 or more. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is 0, the ordinary symbol storage determination process of this time is ended. When the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is 1 or more, the count value (G) of the ordinary symbol holding number counter is updated by −1, and then the second to second symbols in the ordinary symbol holding storage area are updated. The data in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written to the zeroth storage unit. At this time, the ordinary symbol random number value already written in the 0th storage section of the ordinary symbol hold storage area is deleted. Thereafter, the main CPU 110a refers to the ordinary symbol lottery determination table in the main ROM 110b, and based on a combination of the presence or absence of a flag in the time saving game flag storage area and the ordinary symbol random number value in the 0th storage unit of the ordinary symbol holding storage area. And determine the lottery result (hit or loss) of the normal symbol lottery, and set the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds in the non-hours-saving gaming state, 0.2 seconds in the time-saving gaming state) according to the lottery result. decide.

  FIG. 32 (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110b of the main control board 110. In the ordinary symbol lottery determination table, a set of the ordinary symbol random number value and the ordinary symbol lottery lottery result (hit or loss) is referred to in the non-time-saving gaming state and in the time-saving gaming state. It is stored separately.

  Comparing the number of normal symbol determination random numbers in the non-time saving game state and the number of ordinary symbol determination random values in the time reduction game state in the normal symbol lottery determination table, While the normal symbol determination random number is only one (0), the normal symbol determination random number per hit in the time-saving gaming state is 65535 (0 to 65534). Usually, the random number range of the random number value for symbol determination is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

  After determining the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery, the main CPU 110a sets the ordinary symbol variation time in the ordinary symbol time counter, starts the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 22, and sets the ordinary symbol data to 1 Is set.

  In the normal symbol variation process (the process when the general symbol processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (whether the ordinary symbol time counter has become 0) and determines whether the ordinary symbol variation has occurred. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the ordinary symbol variation process of this time is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with the symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol lottery result, and a predetermined ordinary symbol stop time is set in the ordinary symbol time counter. 2 is set to the figure general processing data.

  In the ordinary symbol stop process (the process when the ordinary symbol ordinary data processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the ordinary symbol stop time has elapsed (whether the ordinary symbol time counter has become 0) and stops the ordinary symbol stop. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the current ordinary symbol stop processing ends. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol. If the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is not a winning symbol, 0 is set in the ordinary symbol general electric processing data, and if the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 22 is a winning symbol, the ordinary symbol 3. Set 3 in the general-purpose processing data.

  In the auxiliary game process (the process when the general-purpose data processing data = 3), the main CPU 110a sets the opening time of the second starting port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, and 0.2 seconds in the time-saving game state). (3.5 seconds), the second start-up port 15 is set to the open state over this open time, and thereafter, the second start-up port 15 is set to the closed state, and 0 is set to the general-purpose general-purpose processing data.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when a system reset is generated from the power supply board 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 by a start operation.

  In FIG. 44, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a reads a startup program from the sub ROM 120b and initializes various flags in the sub RAM 120c in response to power-on. After the end of the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random number values 1 to 25 and the like. In addition to the random number updating process, the sub CPU 120a executes a timer interrupt process each time a reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120. After the initialization processing is completed and the game is enabled, the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 45 every 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. Execute a series of processing.

  In FIG. 40, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a to the stack area (S1400).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a timer update process (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a command analysis process (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 The content of the effect is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect input control process (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process according to input signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e of the center key 39E. The details of the effect input control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a data output process (S1800). In the data output processing, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis processing in step S1600 and the effect input control processing in step S1700 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

  FIGS. 46, 47, and 48 are flowcharts showing details of the command analysis processing (step S1600 in FIG. 40). In FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the current command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1610, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol reservation number designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the reception buffer is not the special symbol reservation number designation command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol reservation number update process. In the special symbol hold number update process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol hold number designation command, determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and determines the number of hold display images 37 to be displayed. The corresponding special figure display number designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol reservation number update processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display effects relating to the appearance or erasure of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31 on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1620, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a start winning designation command. When the command in the receiving buffer is the start winning designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the reception buffer is not the start winning designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

  In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning designation command storage process. In the start winning designation command storage processing, the sub CPU 120a selects and selects the one corresponding to the start winning designation command in the reception buffer among the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area. The storage unit having no data and the smallest number in the first to fourth storage units of the effect information storage area is set as the storage destination of the data, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is stored in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data. .

  FIG. 27C shows the effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 27 (c), the effect information storage area includes the 0th storage unit corresponding to the change, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and the suspension of the second special symbol. It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area includes a first storage unit corresponding to the first reservation, a second storage unit corresponding to the second reservation, a third storage unit corresponding to the third reservation, And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 27 (d), each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store a start winning designation command and a look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario data.

  In FIG. 46, after execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs prefetch suspension display change effect selection processing (S1622). In the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a sets the start-award winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621 to the look-ahead hold display change effect in which the change in the symbol corresponding to the start-award winning designation command is the final change. To determine the necessity of the execution of, and when performing the look-ahead hold display change effect, determine the scenario of the hold display change effect up to the final change, and display the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data indicating this scenario The data is stored in the corresponding storage unit in the storage area. Details of the look-ahead hold display change effect selection process will be described later.

  In step S1630, sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designating command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol designating command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

  In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs the effect symbol determination process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing the effect symbol determination process. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command, determines the stop symbol number of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and determines the determined stop symbol number as the sub symbol. A stop symbol designation command is stored in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c to notify the stop symbol number to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, and the generated stop symbol designation command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine a symbol combination at the time of stopping the fluctuation in the fluctuation.

  In step S1640, sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the change start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670 (FIG. 48).

  In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs a storage area shift process. In the storage area shift process, when data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth storage areas of the second effect information storage area. The data in the unit is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second effect information storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data (startup winning designation command, look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario data) stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point are deleted. When data is not stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, The data in the second to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit in the first effect information storage area is written to the zero storage unit. By writing the data in the 0th storage unit, the data stored in the 0th storage unit up to that point is erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642). When the prefetch pending display change effect scenario data is stored (S1642: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643. When the pre-reading hold display change effect scenario data is not stored (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1644.

  In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect control process. In the look-ahead effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines whether or not there is a change in the display mode of the hold display image 37 in the change, and performs the hold display in the change. When changing the display mode of the image 37, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing the change of the display mode of the hold display image 37 is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the prefetch effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designation command instructing the change of the display mode of the hold display image 37, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 are synchronized with the execution time of the prefetch hold display change effect (time t _{HH in} FIG. 22). Then, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 execute the pre-reading pending display change effect.

  In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs a variable effect pattern determination process. The variation effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a design variation effect pattern that is a flow of an effect related to the behavior of the effect symbol 36 and the first movable auditors 330a and 330b in the variation. In the variable effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table in the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command and the effect random number 1 in the reception buffer, and determines the determined symbol variation effect pattern. Is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a fluctuation effect pattern determination table. In the variation effect pattern determination table, a set of the effect random number 1, a symbol variation effect pattern, and an effect pattern designation command is stored for each of the items corresponding to the variation start command. Among the plurality of symbol fluctuation effect patterns corresponding to each fluctuation start command, some include a re-lottery effect and others do not. In addition, there are some that include the second character operation effect and the other that do not.

  For example, the options for the pattern variation production pattern corresponding to the variation start command (MODER data is “E6H” and DATA data is “11H”) (per 16R probability variation, variation time T1, SP reach production, pseudo fluctuation 0 times), There are a symbol variation effect pattern 11, a symbol variation effect pattern 12, a symbol variation effect pattern 13, a symbol variation effect pattern 14, a symbol variation effect pattern 15, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 11 is: normal reach effect → SP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R certain change). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 12 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no tilting of character) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (16R certain change). The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 13 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no tilt of the character) → SP reach effect → first character operation effect (there is a drop of character) → stop pattern (16R sure change hit) ). The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 14 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no tilting of the character) → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect (16R probability change notification) → design stop (16R probability change) ing. The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 15 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation operation effect (with tilting of character) → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect (16R sure change hit notification) → design stop (16R certain hit change) ing.

  In addition, the variation start command (MODER data is “E6H”) and DATA data is “12H” (16R probability variation, variation time T2, SP reach production, one pseudo variation), and the corresponding design variation production pattern options are: There are a symbol fluctuation effect pattern 21, a symbol fluctuation effect pattern 22, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 21 is pseudo continuous effect (1 time) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R certain change). The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 22 is pseudo continuous effect (once) → normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no role tilt) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (16R certain change). .

  In addition, the options of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (MODER data is “E6H” and DATA data is “13H”) (per 16R probability variation, variation time T3, SP reach effect, pseudo fluctuation two times), There are a symbol variation effect pattern 31, a symbol variation effect pattern 32, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 31 is pseudo continuous effect (two times) → normal reach effect → SP reach effect → re-lottery effect → symbol stop (per 16R certain change). The flow of the effect of the pattern fluctuation effect pattern 32 is pseudo continuous effect (two times) → normal reach effect → second character operation effect (no tilt of the character) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (16R certain change). .

  In addition, the options of the pattern variation production pattern corresponding to the variation start command (MODER data is “E6H” and DATA data is “14H”) (16R probability variation, variation time T4, SPSP reach production, pseudo fluctuation 0 times), There are a symbol variation effect pattern 41, a symbol variation effect pattern 42, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 41 is: normal reach effect → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (16R certain change). The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 42 is: normal reach effect → second character operation effect (with tilting of character) → SPSP reach effect → symbol stop (per 16R certain change).

  In addition, the option of the symbol variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation start command (the loss, the variation time T1, the SP reach effect is performed, and the pseudo variation is 0 times) in which the MODE data is “E6H” and the DATA data is “01H” is symbol variation. There are an effect pattern 01, a symbol variation effect pattern 02, and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 01 is: normal reach effect → SP reach effect → symbol stop (losing). The flow of the effect of the symbol fluctuation effect pattern 02 is as follows: normal reach effect → second character operation operation effect (no tilt of character) → SP reach effect → symbol stop (losing).

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the variable effect pattern determination processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform a series of effects in accordance with the design fluctuation effect pattern of the command from the start to the end of the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, by the image display device 31 and the audio display. The output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1645 in FIG. 46, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the first character operation effect. When including the first accessory operation effect (S1645: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1646. When the first character operation effect is not included (S1645: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

In step S1646, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception validity period of the first accessory operation effect within fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and resets this time for reset. A value obtained by dividing by 2 milliseconds, which is the clock pulse generation cycle, is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter of the first accessory operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Also, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception validity period of the first character operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and _calculates this time in 2 milliseconds. The value obtained by the division is set in the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 10). (t _AY2 ).

  In step S1647, the sub CPU 120a sets the first operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first operation effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that execution of the first accessory operation effect is waiting.

  In step S1648, sub CPU 120a performs a first bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process. In the first accessory operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the first character item operation specific notice effect (FIG. 10C), and executes the first character item operation specific notice effect. In this case, an effect pattern designating command for instructing the execution of the first special effect operation specific notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the first bonus operation specific announcement effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the first bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute the first special operation operation specific announcement effect in _{synchronization with} the execution time of the first special operation operation announcement effect (time _{t'AY1 in} FIG. 10). The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1649 in FIG. 47, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation effect pattern determined in the variation effect pattern determination process includes the second character operation effect. If the second CPU accessory effect is included (S1649: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650. When the second character operation effect is not included (S1646: No), the process proceeds to step S1653.

In step S1650, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{SY1 in} FIG. 11) of the operation acceptance effective period of the second accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and calculates this time as 2 millimeters. The value divided by the second is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception effective period of the second accessory operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and calculates this time in 2 milliseconds. The value obtained by the division is set in the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{SY1 in} FIG. 11), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 11). It becomes 0 at (t _SY2 ).

  In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a sets the second operation effect standby flag in the operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second operation effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that execution of the second accessory operation effect is waiting.

  In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs a second bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process. In the second bonus item operation specific notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the second character item operation specific notice effect (FIG. 11C), and executes the second character item operation specific notice effect. In this case, an effect pattern designating command for instructing the execution of the second bonus item operation specific notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the second special operation operation specific announcement effect in accordance with the execution time of the second special operation operation announcement effect (time t ′ _{SY1 in} FIG. 11). The image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1653, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect selection process. In the step-up effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the step-up effect (FIGS. 13A and 13B) based on the change start command in the reception buffer. When executing, determine the scenario of the step-up effect to the final stage, generate an effect pattern specification command to instruct the execution of the effect according to this scenario, and store the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer set. Details of the step-up effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute one or more step effects in the step-up effect (time t _SUP1 , t _SUP2 , t _SUP3 , t _SUP4 , t _{SPS in} FIG. 13). ), The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 execute the step effect of the step-up effect.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation effect selection process. In the line operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the line operation effect (FIGS. 15A and 15B) based on the change start command in the reception buffer, and performs the line operation effect. Is executed, an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of a speech operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the line operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the line operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the speech operation effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect in accordance with the execution time of the speech operation effect (time t _{SR0 in} FIG. 15). Drive devices 33a and 33b and effect lighting device 34. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the line operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the dialogue operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of the execution of the dialogue operation effect. If the sub CPU 120a is to execute a line operation effect (S1655: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1656. When it is determined that the line operation effect is not to be executed (S1655: No), the process proceeds to step S1657.

  In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a performs a speech operation specific notice effect selection process. In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the execution of the dialogue operation specific announcement effect (FIG. 15C) is performed. Is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the line operation specific notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the dialogue operation specific advancement effect on the image display device 31 in accordance with the execution time of the dialogue operation specific advancement effect (time t ′ _{SR1 in} FIG. 15). The output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect selection process. In the roulette operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the roulette operation effect (FIGS. 16A and 16B) based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, and performs the roulette operation effect. Is executed, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of a roulette operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the roulette operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the roulette operation effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect according to the execution time of the roulette operation effect (time _{tRL0 in} FIG. 16). Drive devices 33a, 33b and effect lighting device 34. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the roulette operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1658, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the roulette operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of the execution of the roulette operation effect. When it is determined that the roulette operation effect is to be executed (S1658: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659. If the roulette operation effect is not to be executed (S1658: No), the process proceeds to step S1660.

  In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific announcement effect selection process. In the roulette operation specific announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the roulette operation specific announcement effect (FIG. 16C), and executes the roulette operation specific announcement effect. Is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the roulette operation specific announcement effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the roulette operation specific announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the roulette operation specific announcement effect on the image display device 31 in accordance with the execution time of the roulette operation specific announcement effect (time t ′ _{RL1 in} FIG. 16). The output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1660, sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect selection process. In the gauge operation effect selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation effect (FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 17C) based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer. When the determination is made and the gauge operation effect is to be executed, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the gauge operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the gauge operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 adjust the execution time of the gauge operation effect (time _{tCG0 in} FIG. 17), the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b and the effect lighting device 34 to start the execution of the gauge operation effect. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the gauge operation effect depending on whether the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the gauge operation effect is to be executed in the determination of the necessity of the execution of the gauge operation effect. If the sub CPU 120a is to execute the gauge operation effect (S1661: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1662. When the gauge operation effect is not to be executed (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1663.

  In step S1662, sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process. In the gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation specific announcement effect (FIG. 17D), and executes the gauge operation specific announcement effect when executing the gauge operation specific announcement effect. Is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the gauge operation specific announcement effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 display the gauge operation specific announcement effect on the image display device 31 and the sound in accordance with the execution time of the gauge operation specific announcement effect (time t ′ _{GG3 in} FIG. 17). The output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

  In step S1660, sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect selection process. In the timing operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the timing operation effect (FIGS. 18A, 18B, and 18C) based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer. When determining and executing the timing operation effect, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the timing operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the timing operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the timing operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 adjust the timing operation effect to the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect according to the execution time of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM0 in} FIG. 18). Drive devices 33a, 33b and effect lighting device 34. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 change the notification mode of the operation result in the timing operation effect depending on whether or not the effect button 35 is operated.

  In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a performs a reach back button operation effect selection process. In the reach back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not execution of the reach back button operation effect (FIG. 19A) is necessary based on the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, and performs the reach back button operation effect. Is executed, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of the reach back button operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the reach back button operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the reach back button operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command on the condition that the back button operation is successful in accordance with the reach establishment timing (timing t _{NR in} FIG. 19) within the change time T of the change. The button operation effect is performed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device.

  In step S1665, sub CPU 120a performs a step-up back button operation effect selection process. In the step-up back button operation effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the execution of the step-up back button operation effect (FIG. 20A) is necessary based on the change start command in the reception buffer. When executing a button operation effect, an effect pattern specifying command for instructing execution of a step-up back button operation effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern specifying command is set in a transmission buffer. The details of the step-up back button operation effect selection process will be described later.

The command set in the transmission buffer in the step-up back button operation effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receives this command, the step-up back button operation determination timing fluctuation time of the fluctuation T (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) On condition that the combined back button operation is successful, the step-up back button operation effect is executed by the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device.

  In step S1670, sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation stop command. When the command in the reception buffer is the fluctuation stop command (S1670: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

  In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs an effect symbol stop process. In the effect design stop processing, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designation command for stopping the effect design 36, and sets the generated stop designation command in the transmission buffer.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the effect relating to the stop of the effect design 36 is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. To run.

  In step S1680, sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the gaming state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the reception buffer is not a game state designation command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

  In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs a game state setting process. In the game state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the game state designation command in the reception buffer, obtains the current game state, and stores the game state information indicating the obtained game state in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

  In step S1690, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. When the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

  In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game effect selection process. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information of the determined opening effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In addition, when the opening designation command is an 8R probability change or an 8R regular hit, the sub CPU 120a executes the promotion effect in the fourth round, and stores it in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round in the sub RAM 120c. The promotion effect execution data indicating the contents of the promotion effect is stored. The details of the special game effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute the opening effect of the special game. .

  In step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. When the command in the reception buffer is the round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1693. If the command in the reception buffer is not the round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

  In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs a round effect control process. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer and determines whether or not the current round is the execution round of the promotion effect (the fourth round per 8R probability change or the 8R normal). judge. The sub CPU 120a determines an effect pattern of the current round based on the determination result, stores information of the determined effect pattern in an effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates an effect pattern designation command of the effect pattern. Then, the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the round effect control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control processing is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute a special game round effect. .

  In step S16934, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command (S1694: No), the current command analysis processing ends.

  In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs a special game end effect control process. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer, determines an ending effect pattern, and stores information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of the determined effect pattern, and sets the effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer. The sub CPU 120a clears any flags set during the special game, if any.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. Upon receiving this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 cause the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34 to execute the ending effect of the special game. .

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing details of the look-ahead suspension display change effect selection process (step S1622 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a sets a hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area in which the start winning designation command is stored in the start winning designation command storage process as a look-ahead determination target hold, and the fluctuation of the look-ahead determination target hold is developed. It is determined whether or not the variation has an effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) (S1622-1). If the change has the development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a change having an advanced effect (S1622-1: No), the current look-ahead suspension display change effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a change having an advanced effect in the hold whose change order is earlier than the hold of the prefetch determination target. When there is no change having the development effect (S1622-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3. If there is a change having an advanced effect (S1622-2: Yes), the current look-ahead suspension display change effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process. In the pre-reading hold display change effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect execution determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and based on a combination of the advance determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the look-ahead determination target hold and the random number for effect 2 Then, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the prefetch display change effect.

  FIG. 51A is a diagram showing a look-ahead suspension display change effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead pending display change effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 2 and the necessity of execution ("execute" and "do not execute") is referred to when the preliminary determination result is a big hit And what is referred to at the time of loss. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random number values 2 are associated with data indicating that the look-ahead suspension display change effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers 2 are used. The effect random number value 2 is associated with data indicating that the prefetch pending display change effect is not executed. As for the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random number values 2 are associated with data indicating that a prefetch pending display change effect is to be executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random number values 2 are provided. Is associated with data indicating that the pre-reading hold display change effect is not executed.

  In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the prefetch pending display change effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1622-4: No), the current look-ahead suspension display change effect selection process ends.

  In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch pending display change final stage determination process. In the pre-reading hold display change final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage suspension display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on a combination of the preliminary determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning prize designation command of the prefetch determination target suspension and the random number for effect 3, The display mode of the hold display image 37 at the final stage in the look-ahead hold display change effect is determined.

  FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a final stage suspension display mode determination table. In the final stage suspension display mode determination table, when a set of data indicating the random number for effect 3 and the suspension display mode of the final stage (“blue”, “green”, and “red”) is determined to be a jackpot, Are stored separately for those to be referred to when the game is lost. Specifically, for the jackpot, ten (0 to 9) effect random numbers 3 are associated with data indicating the suspended display mode of “blue”, and 30 (10 to 39) effect random numbers 3 The random number 3 is associated with the data indicating the “green” hold display mode, and the 60 (40 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating the “red” hold display mode. I have. As for the loss, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating the suspended display mode of “blue”, and 30 (60 to 89) effect random number values 3 are “ The data is associated with the data indicating the “green” hold display mode, and ten (90 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating the “red” hold display mode.

  In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch pending display change effect scenario determination process. In the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table of the sub-ROM 120b, and determines the pre-judgment result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning prize designation command of the pre-fetch judgment target hold, the hold display mode at the final stage, the number of hold Based on the combination of the effect random number value 4, a look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario is determined.

  There are two types of look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination tables: one to refer to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit, and one to refer to when a loss occurs. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario determination table referred to when the result of the preliminary determination is a jackpot. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating a look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario determination table that is referred to when the pre-determination result is a loss.

  In the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario determination table, each set of the random number for effect 4 and the look-ahead hold display change effect scenario data corresponds to a combination of the hold display mode and the number of hold in the final stage of the look-ahead hold display change effect. Is stored in In the jackpot jackpot look-ahead display change effect scenario determination table (FIG. 52) and the loss look-ahead look-ahead display change effect scenario determination table (FIG. 53), the effect on the hold scenario HR39 and HR49 of the hold display change effect called “falling”. The presence / absence of assignment of the random number 4 for use is different.

  More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of hold 1 is a hold display change effect scenario HB11. The suspended display change effect scenario HB11 is a scenario in which the suspended display image 37 is turned blue at the last change. 100 (0-99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change effect scenario HB11. Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 2 include hold display change rendering scenarios HB21 and HB22. The suspended display change rendering scenarios HB21 and HB22 are scenarios in which the suspended display image 37 turns blue at different times. 70 (0-69) effect random number values 4 for the hold display change effect scenario HB21 and 30 (70-99) effect random number values 4 for the hold display change effect scenario HB22 are associated with each other. ing.

  Options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of holds 3 include hold display change rendering scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. The suspension display change rendering scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33 are scenarios in which the suspension display image 37 turns blue at different times. Twenty to fifty effect random numbers 4 are associated with each of the suspended display change effect scenarios HB31, HB32, and HB33. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of hold 4 include the hold display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44. The suspended display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44 are scenarios in which the suspended display image 37 turns blue at different times. Ten to forty random number values 4 for effect are respectively associated with the suspended display change effect scenarios HB41, HB42, HB43, and HB44.

  An option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of hold 1 is a hold display change effect scenario HG11. The suspended display change effect scenario HG11 is a scenario in which the suspended display image 37 is turned green at the final change. 100 (0-99) production random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change production scenario HG11. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 2 include hold display change rendering scenarios HG21 and HG22. The suspended display change effect scenarios HG21 and HG22 are scenarios in which the time when the suspended display image 37 turns green and the presence / absence of a change to blue before reaching the position are different. 70 (0-69) production random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG21, and 30 (70-99) production random number values 4 are associated with the pending display change production scenario HG22. ing.

  Options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 3 include hold display change rendering scenarios HG31 to HG38. The suspension display change rendering scenarios HG31 to HG38 are scenarios in which the time when the suspension display image 37 turns green and the presence / absence of the change to blue before reaching the time are different. 5 to 20 effect random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change effect scenarios HG31 to HG38, respectively. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of holds 4 include hold display change rendering scenarios HG41 to HG48. The suspended display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48 are scenarios in which the time when the suspended display image 37 turns green and the presence / absence of a change to blue before reaching the time are different. Five to twenty effect random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change effect scenarios HG41 to HG48, respectively.

  An option corresponding to the combination of red and the number of hold 1 is a hold display change effect scenario HR11. The suspension display change rendering scenario HR11 is a scenario in which the suspension display image 37 is turned red at the last change. 100 (0-99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change effect scenario HR11. Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 2 include hold display change rendering scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24. The suspended display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24 are scenarios in which the time at which the suspended display image 37 turns red and the presence or absence of a change to blue and green before reaching it are different. 10 to 40 effect random number values 4 are associated with the suspended display change effect scenarios HR21, HR22, HR23, and HR24, respectively.

  Options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of holds 3 include hold display change rendering scenarios HR31 to HR39. The suspended display change rendering scenarios HR31 to HR39 are scenarios in which the time when the suspended display image 37 turns red and the presence / absence of a change to blue and green before reaching it are different. Here, the hold display change rendering scenarios HR31 to HR38 are “start-up” scenarios that change to a hold display mode having a higher degree of reliability in a later change, such as blue → green → red, than in the previous change. On the other hand, the hold display change rendering scenario HR39 is a “falling down” scenario in which the subsequent change changes to a hold display mode with lower reliability than the previous change, such as green → red → green. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38, and one (99) effect is assigned to the hold display change effect scenario HR39. The random number for use 4 is associated therewith. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), five to twenty effect random number values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR31 to HR38. Further, in the loss table, no effect random number value 4 is associated with the suspended display change effect scenario HR39.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of hold 4 include the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49. The suspended display change rendering scenarios HR41 to HR49 are scenarios in which the time when the suspended display image 37 turns red and the presence or absence of a change to blue and green before reaching the time are different. Of the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR49, the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48 are “rise” scenarios, and the hold display change effect scenario HR49 is a “fall” scenario. In the jackpot table (FIG. 52), 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48, and one (99) effect is assigned to the hold display change effect scenario HR49. The random number for use 4 is associated therewith. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 53), 5 to 20 effect random number values 4 are associated with the hold display change effect scenarios HR41 to HR48. Also, in the loss table, no effect random number value 4 is associated with the suspended display change effect scenario HR49.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1, with respect to the combination of red and the number of holdings of 3 and the combination of red and the number of holdings of 4, the “falling” hold display change rendering scenarios HR39 and HR49 can be selected only from the jackpot table. ing. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, the look-ahead suspension display change effect of “falling down” is a final change jackpot confirmation effect (an effect of notifying that the final change becomes a jackpot before the final change symbol stops).

  In step S1622-7 in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a stores the scenario data of the look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario determined in the look-ahead suspension display change effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

  Here, in the pre-reading hold display change effect selection process, when there is an advanced effect in the pre-read determination target hold and there is no advanced effect in the previous change in the change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No). Then, a pre-reading hold display change effect execution determination process is performed. According to such a processing flow, when the effect control board 120 executes the look-ahead hold display change effect, the effect control board 120 executes the development effect as an effect during the change display of the final change of the look-ahead hold display change effect, and The development effect is restricted from being performed as the effect during the change display before the final change of the display change effect.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing details of the effect symbol determination process (step S1631 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 54, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the change stops at the symbol with a big hit (S1631-1: Yes). When the fluctuation stops at the symbol with the big hit (S1631-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631-2. When the fluctuation does not stop at the symbol of the big hit (S1631-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1631-3.

  In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects the symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the type of the winning jackpot, and in the selected symbol combination. Four stop symbol numbers of a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R, and a fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects a symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from those corresponding to the loss, and selects the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination. The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined four stopped symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1631-5, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol designation command for notifying the determined four stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol designation command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the details of the first bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process (step S1648 in FIG. 46). In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs a first bonus item operation specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1648-1). In the first role item operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and based on the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the random number value 5 for effect, It is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the first accessory operation specific notice effect.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a first bonus item operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the first role item operation specific notice effect presentation execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 5 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is set when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. The information to be referred to and the information to be referred to in the event of a loss are stored separately. Specifically, for the jackpot, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) random number values for effect 5 execute the first accessory operation specific notice effect, and 80 (20 to 99) effect values The random number value 5 is associated with data indicating that the first accessory operation specific announcement effect is not executed, respectively. Regarding the loss, 100 (0 to 99) random number values for effect 5 are associated with data indicating that the first accessory operation specific announcement effect is not executed. As for the loss, no data of the effect random number 5 is associated with the data indicating the execution of the first accessory operation specific notice effect. With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the first role operation of the first character operation when performing the first character operation operation effect with the drop of the character, which is the effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not the big hit. In the case where a special notice effect can be executed, and the first character operation effect without the drop of the character, which is an effect that is easy to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit, is executed, the first special object operation specific notice effect Is regulated.

  In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the first accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. When the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1648-2: No), the present first bonus item operation specific advance notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the first character operation specific notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer, The operation specific notice effect selection process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the details of the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect selection process (step S1652 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 57, the sub CPU 120a performs a second bonus item operation specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1652-1). In the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the second accessory operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the change start command in the reception buffer, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the change. It is determined whether or not the execution of the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect is required, based on the combination of the development of the event and the random number value 6 for effect.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a second bonus item operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the second bonus item operation specific notice effect presentation execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number 6 and the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) includes the jackpot determination result and the presence or absence of development. It is stored separately for each combination and corresponding one. Specifically, for a combination in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and development has occurred, data indicating that 75 (0 to 74) effect random number values 6 will execute the second bonus item operation specific notice effect, Twenty-five (75 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect is not to be executed. For the combination in which the jackpot determination result is a jackpot and no development, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect is not executed. Regarding this combination, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is to be executed.

  As for the combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and developed, data indicating that 80 (0 to 79) effect random number values 6 execute the second auditorium operation specific notice effect, and 20 (80 to 99) ) Is associated with data indicating that the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect is not executed. For the combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and no development is made, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with data indicating that the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect is not executed. Regarding this combination, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the second accessory operation specific notice effect is to be executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 performs the second role operation with the role of tilting the role, which is the effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not the hit, when the second role operation is performed. When a special announcement effect can be executed, and the second bonus item operation effect without the tilting of the accessory is executed, which is an effect easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a large jackpot, the second announcement operation specific announcement effect Is regulated.

  In step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1652-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1652-3. When the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1652-2: No), the current second-principal-potential-operation specific announcement effect selection process ends.

  In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the second bonus item operation specific announcement effect, sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer, The operation specific notice effect selection process is terminated.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing details of the step-up effect selection process (step S1653 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect execution determination process (S1653-1). In the step-up effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect execution determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and performs the step-up effect based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 7. Is determined.

  FIG. 60A is a diagram illustrating a step-up effect execution determination table. In the step-up effect execution determination table, the combination of the effect random number 7 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from what is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 7 are associated with data indicating that a step-up effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers are used. The random number 7 is associated with data indicating that the step-up effect is not executed. As for the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random number values 7 are associated with data indicating that a step-up effect is to be executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random number values 7 are step-up effects. It is associated with data indicating that the up effect is not executed.

  In step S1653-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the step-up effect execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1653-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1653-3. If the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1653-2: No), the current step-up effect selection process ends.

  In step S1653-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect final stage determination process. In the step-up effect final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect final stage determination table of the sub-ROM 120b and performs step-up based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 8. Determine the final stage of the production.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating a step-up effect final stage determination table. In the step-up effect final stage determination table, a set of the random number for effect 8 and the data indicating the final stage is stored separately for those to be referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those to be referred to when the loss is lost. I have. Specifically, for the jackpot, three (0 to 2) effect random number values 8 indicate “normal stage 1 (blue)” and five (3 to 7) effect random number values 8 Data indicating “normal stage 2 (blue)”, seven (8 to 14) effect random numbers 8 indicating “normal stage 2 (green)”, and 11 (15 to 25) effect random numbers Data in which the random number 8 indicates “normal stage 3 (blue)”, data in which twelve (26 to 37) effect random numbers 8 indicate “normal stage 3 (green)”, and thirteen (38 to 51) ) Production random number 8 indicates "normal stage 3 (red)", 14 (52-63) production random number 8 indicates "normal stage 4 (blue)", and 16 (64-80) the effect random number 8 indicating "normal stage 4 (green)" and the 18 (81-98) effect random number 8 indicating "normal stage 4 (red)" And data indicating a data one (99) effect-use random number 8 indicates a "special step", are respectively associated.

  Regarding the loss, the 18 (0 to 17) production random number values 8 indicate “normal stage 1 (blue)”, and the 16 (18 to 33) production random number values 8 indicate “normal stage 2 (blue)”. Blue), 14 (34-47) effect random numbers 8 indicate "normal stage 2 (green)", and 13 (48-60) effect random numbers 8 indicate "normal stage 2 (green)". Data indicating "normal stage 3 (blue)", twelve (61-72) staging random numbers 8 indicating "normal stage 3 (green)", and eleven (73-83) staging random numbers Numerical value 8 indicates “normal stage 3 (red)”, seven (84 to 90) random number values for effect 8 indicating “normal stage 4 (blue)”, and five (91 to 95) Of the production random number 8 indicates "normal stage 4 (green)" and four (96-99) production random number 8 indicate "normal stage 4 (red)" And over data are associated respectively. Regarding the loss, none of the effect random number values 8 is associated with the data indicating the “special stage”.

  In step S1653-4, sub CPU 120a performs a step-up effect scenario determination process. In the step-up effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up effect scenario determination table in the sub-ROM 120b, and determines a step-up effect scenario based on the combination of the final stage determined in the previous step and the effect random number 9.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up effect scenario determination table. In the step-up effect scenario determination table, a set of the effect random number 9 and the step-up effect scenario data is stored for each item corresponding to the final stage of the step-up effect.

  More specifically, in this table, the option corresponding to the normal stage 1 (blue) includes the step-up effect scenario GS11. The step-up effect scenario GS11 is a scenario in which only the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) is performed. 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS11.

  An option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (blue) includes a step-up effect scenario GS21. The step-up effect scenario GS21 is a scenario that evolves from the step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to the step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue). One hundred (0 to 99) effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS21.

  An option corresponding to the normal stage 2 (green) includes a step-up effect scenario GS22. The step-up effect scenario GS22 is a scenario that evolves from a step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) to a step effect of the normal stage 2 (green). One hundred (0 to 99) effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS22.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (blue) include step-up effect scenarios GS31 and GS32. The step-up effect scenario GS31 is a scenario that evolves into a step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → a step effect of the normal stage 2 (blue) → a step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue). The step-up effect scenario GS32 is a scenario that evolves into a step effect of the normal stage 1 (blue) → step skipping → a step effect of the normal stage 3 (blue). 90 (0-89) effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS31, and 10 (90-99) effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenario GS32. .

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (green) include the step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35. The step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1 and 2 before reaching the normal stage 3 (green) and the presence / absence of skipping the step effect in the middle are different. Step-up effect scenarios GS33, GS34, and GS35 are associated with 10 to 45 effect random number values 9 respectively.

  Options corresponding to the normal stage 3 (red) include step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39. The step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1 and 2 before the normal stage 3 (red) are different and whether or not the step effects are skipped in the middle. The step-up effect scenarios GS36, GS37, GS38, and GS39 are associated with 10 to 30 effect random number values 9, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (blue) include step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43. The step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43 are scenarios in which the presence / absence of skipping step effects in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before reaching the normal stage 4 (blue) is different. Step-up effect scenarios GS41, GS42, and GS43 are associated with 5 to 90 effect random number values 9 respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (green) include step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60. The step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images in the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before the normal stage 4 (green) are different, and whether or not the step effects in the middle are skipped. Five to twenty effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenarios GS51 to GS60, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the normal stage 4 (red) include the step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70. The step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1, 2, and 3 before the normal stage 4 (red) are different, and whether or not the step effects in the middle are skipped. The step-up effect scenarios GS61 to GS70 are associated with 5 to 20 effect random number values 9 respectively.

  Options corresponding to the special stage include step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90. The step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90 are scenarios in which the frame colors of the photo images of the normal stages 1, 2, 3, and 4 before reaching the special stage and the presence or absence of the step effect in the middle are different. Five to twenty effect random numbers 9 are associated with the step-up effect scenarios GS81 to GS90, respectively.

  In step S1653-5 in FIG. 59, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the step-up effect scenario determined in the step-up effect scenario determination process in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing details of the dialogue operation effect selection process (step S1654 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialog operation effect execution determination process (S1654-1). In the dialogue operation effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the random number value 10 for effect, performs the lineage operation effect. Is determined.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram illustrating a dialogue operation effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation effect execution determination table, the combination of the effect random number 10 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 45 (0 to 44) effect random numbers 10 are associated with data indicating that a line operation effect is to be executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random numbers are used. The random number value 10 is associated with data indicating that the line operation effect is not executed. As for the loss, 55 (0 to 54) effect random number values 10 are associated with data indicating that a speech operation effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random number values 10 are dialogue. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1654-2, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the determination result of the dialogue operation effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1654-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1654-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1654-2: No), the current dialogue operation effect selection process ends.

  In step S1654-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process for determining a progress pattern of a dialogue operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of an operation result that progresses in response to the operation of the effect button 35 in the line operation effect. In the progress mode determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the speech operation effect development progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 11, the dialogue effect. Determine the progress pattern of

  FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table. In the dialogue operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 11 and the progress pattern are stored separately for those that are referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those that are referred to when the big hit is lost.

  Specifically, the options corresponding to the jackpot in this table include the progress patterns SP11 to SR15 (the character that speaks is the character A), and the development patterns SR21 to SR25 (the character that speaks the character is the character B). Certain ones), development patterns SR31 to SR35 (characters whose speech is a character C), development patterns SR41 to SR45 (characters whose speech is a character D), and development patterns SR50 (a premium character appears) ).

  Regarding the jackpot, five development random numbers 11 are associated with the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. 4 to 5 effect random number values 11 are associated with the progress patterns SR41 to SR45. One effect random number 11 is associated with the progress pattern SR50.

  Regarding the loss, four to five effect random numbers 11 are associated with the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35. Seven effect random number values 11 are associated with the development patterns SR41 to SR45. No effect random number 11 is associated with the progress pattern SR50.

  Here, in this table, the difference between the selectivity in the case of the jackpot and the selectivity in the case of the loss in the progress patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35 is 1% at the maximum, whereas the progress patterns SR41 to SR15 are different. The difference between the selectivity in the case of the big hit and the selectivity in the case of the loss in SR45 is 3% at maximum. Progress patterns SR11 to SR15 (character A speaks), SR21 to SR25 (character B speaks), and SR31 to SR35 (character C speaks) and progress patterns SR41 to SR45 When compared with (the character D speaks), the development patterns SR11 to SR15, SR21 to SR25, and SR31 to SR35 are hard to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a large jackpot, and the development patterns SR41 to SR45. Is easy to select when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot.

In step S1654-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the start time (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance effective period of the dialog operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and this time is set to 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the line operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{SR2 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance effective period of the dialog operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the line operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception validity period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception validity period (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15), and the operation reception validity period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception validity period (time in FIG. 15). It becomes 0 at (t _SR2 ).

  In step S1654-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a dialogue operation effect standby flag in the dialogue operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The line operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the line operation effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1654-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current dialog operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process (step S1656 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 64, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1656-1). In the line operation specific announcement effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific notice effect rendering execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the random number 12 for rendering, the dialogue. The necessity of execution of the operation specific notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a speech operation specific notice effect execution determination table. In the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 12 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored in the evolution pattern determination process in the evolution pattern SR50 (premium character). Are determined and stored when they are determined, and those that are referenced when other items are determined are stored. Specifically, as for the progress pattern SR50, data indicating that one (0) effect random number value 12 executes a speech operation specific notice effect, and 99 (2-99) effect random number values 12 Is associated with data indicating that the dialogue operation specific notice effect is not executed. With respect to those other than the progress pattern SR50, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 12 are associated with data indicating that the speech operation specific notice effect is not executed. With respect to those other than the development pattern SR50, no effect random number value 12 is associated with the data indicating that the speech operation specific notice effect is to be executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the line operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, the effect control board 120 executes the specific notice effect before the operation of the effect button 35 in the line operation effect. Regulate.

  In step S1656-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the dialogue operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1656-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1656-3. If the result of the determination is "do not execute" (S1656-1: No), the current dialogue operation specific notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1656-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the dialogue operation specific notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current line operation specific notice effect effect selection processing. To end.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing details of the roulette operation effect selection process (step S1657 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation effect execution determination process (S1657-1). In the roulette operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and performs roulette operation effect based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 13. Is determined.

  FIG. 67A is a diagram illustrating a roulette operation effect execution determination table. In the roulette manipulation effect execution determination table, the set of the effect random number 13 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 13 are associated with data indicating that a roulette operation effect is to be executed, and 55 (55 to 99) effect random numbers 13 are used. The random number 13 is associated with data indicating that a roulette operation effect is not executed. As for the loss, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 13 are associated with data indicating that a roulette operation effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers 13 are roulette effects. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1657-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the roulette operation effect rendering execution determination process is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1657-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1657-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1657-2: No), the current roulette operation effect selection process ends.

  In step S1657-3, sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining a progress pattern of a roulette operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of an operation result that progresses in response to the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the jackpot determination result (jackpot or loss), the jackpot determination result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the variation start command in the reception buffer, and establishes reach in the variation. The roulette operation effect development pattern is determined based on the presence / absence, presence / absence of a pseudo continuous effect in the change, SP reach effect in the change, and a combination with the effect random number 14.

  FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram showing a roulette operation effect progress mode determination table. In the roulette operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 14 and the progress pattern includes a jackpot determination result (big hit or loss), whether or not reach has been established, whether or not there is a pseudo continuous effect, and whether or not there is an SP reach effect. Are stored for each of the combinations corresponding to the combination.

  Specifically, the options corresponding to the combination of the jackpot, no reach, no pseudo continuous production, and no SP reach production in this table include a progress pattern RL11 (roulette roll is “!”), A progress pattern RL12. (The roulette roll is "Chance"), the progress pattern RL13 (roulette roll is "NEXT"), and the progress pattern RL14 (roulette roll is "SP"). The development pattern RL11 has 95 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has two effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL13 has two effect random numbers 14, and the progress pattern RL14. One effect random number 14 is associated with each effect.

  The options corresponding to the combination of the jackpot, reach, no pseudo continuous production, and no SP reach production include the progress patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The development pattern RL11 has 80 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 15 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 3 effect random numbers 14, and the progress pattern RL14. The two effect random number values 14 are associated with each other.

  The options corresponding to the combination of the jackpot, the reach establishment, the pseudo continuous production, and the no SP reach production include the development patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The development pattern RL11 has 85 effect random number values 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 8 effect random number values 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 5 effect random number values 14, and the progress pattern RL14. The two effect random number values 14 are associated with each other.

  The options corresponding to the combination of the jackpot, the reach establishment, the pseudo continuous production, and the SP reach production include the development patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15 (premium character appears). The development pattern RL11 has 85 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 5 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 5 effect random numbers 14, and the progress pattern RL14. Four effect random number values 14 are associated with the development pattern RL15, and one effect random number value 14 is associated with the development pattern RL15.

  The options corresponding to the combination of loss, no reach, no pseudo continuous production, and no SP reach production include the development patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The progress pattern RL11 has 97 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has one effect random number 14, the progress pattern RL13 has one effect random number 14, and the progress pattern RL14. One effect random number 14 is associated with each effect.

  The options corresponding to the combination of “losing”, “reach established”, “no pseudo continuous production”, and “no SP reach production” include development patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, and RL14. The development pattern RL11 has 84 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 13 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL13 has two effect random numbers 14, and the progress pattern RL14. One effect random number 14 is associated with each effect.

  The options corresponding to the combination of “losing”, “reach established”, “simulated continuous production”, and “no SP reach production” include development patterns RL11, RL12, RL13, RL14, and RL15. The development pattern RL11 has 88 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL12 has 7 effect random numbers 14, the progress pattern RL13 has 4 effect random numbers 14, and the progress pattern RL14. One effect random number 14 is associated with each effect. No effect random number 14 is associated with the development pattern RL15.

  Here, in this table, the difference between the selectivity in the case of the jackpot in the development pattern RL11 and the selectivity in the case of the loss is 4% at the maximum, whereas the selection in the case of the jackpot in the development patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14. The difference between the rate and the selectivity in the case of a loss is up to 1%. Progress pattern RL11 (roulette roll is "!"), Progress pattern RL12 (roulette roll is "Chance"), RL13 (roulette roll is "NEXT"), and RL14 (roulette roll is "SP") )), The progress pattern RL11 is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit, and the progress patterns RL12, RL13, and RL14 are hard to be selected when the big hit determination result is not a big hit.

In step S1557-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16) of the operation acceptance effective period of the roulette operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and this time is set to 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the roulette operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU120a determines the remaining time to the end time of the operation reception lifetime of the roulette operation effect in fluctuation period T of the fluctuation (time t _RL2 in Fig. _16), a value obtained by dividing the time 2 ms Is set to the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the roulette operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16), and the operation reception valid period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception valid period (time in FIG. 16). (t _RL2 ).

  In step S1557-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a roulette operation effect standby flag in the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The roulette operation effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the roulette operation effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1557-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current roulette operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing details of the roulette operation specific announcement effect selection process (step S1659 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 68, the sub CPU 120a performs a roulette operation specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1659-1). In the roulette operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the roulette operation specific advance effect based on a combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) and the random number value 15 for effect. Is determined.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a roulette operation specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the roulette operation specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 15 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored in the evolution pattern RL15 (premium character) in the evolution mode determination process. Are stored separately for those that are referred to when the line is determined) and those that are referred to when other lines are determined. Specifically, for the development pattern RL15, data indicating that one (0) effect random number 12 executes a roulette operation specific announcement effect, and 99 (1 to 99) effect random numbers 12 Is associated with data indicating that a roulette operation specific announcement effect is not to be executed. For those other than the progress pattern RL15, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 12 are associated with data indicating that the roulette operation specific advance notice effect is not executed. For the patterns other than the progress pattern RL15, no effect random number 12 is associated with the data indicating that the roulette operation specific announcement effect is to be executed. With such a configuration of the table, when performing the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol, the effect control board 120 causes the specific announcement effect to be executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect. Regulate.

  In step S1659-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the result of the roulette operation specific advance notice effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1659-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1659-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1659-2: No), the current roulette operation specific advance notice effect selection processing ends.

  In step S1659-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the roulette operation specific notice effect, sets the generated effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer, and performs the current roulette operation specific notice effect effect selection processing. To end.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing details of the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation effect execution determination process (S1660-1). In the gauge operation effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 16, the gauge operation effect. Is determined.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a gauge operation effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation effect execution determination table, the combination of the effect random number 16 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 16 are associated with data indicating that a gauge operation effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers are used. The random number 16 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation effect is not executed. For the loss, 45 (0 to 44) effect random numbers 16 are associated with data indicating that a gauge operation effect is to be executed, and 55 (45 to 99) effect random numbers 16 are gauge values. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed.

  In step S1660-2, sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1660-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1660-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1660-2: No), the current gauge operation effect selection process ends.

  In step S1660-3, sub CPU 120a performs a final stage determination process. The final stage determination process is a process of determining the final score of the gauge operation effect. In the final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number values 17, 18, and 19 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destination determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines the jackpot determination result (jackpot or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer, whether or not the SP reach effect has been developed, and whether the SP reach effect has been developed. Based on the presence or absence, the upper table 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the middle table, and the lower table of the sub-ROM 120b are determined as reference destinations. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reference destination among the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and determines the hundreds digit based on the effect random number 17. The sub CPU 120a refers to the middle order table and determines the number of the tens place based on the random number value for effect 18. The sub CPU 120a refers to the lower table and determines the number of ones digit based on the effect random number 19. Then, the sub CPU 120a adds the hundreds digit, the tens digit, and the ones digit, and sets the addition result as the final acquisition point.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a reference destination determination table. FIG. 73A shows the upper table 1. FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing the upper table 2. FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram showing the upper table 3. FIG. 73D is a diagram illustrating the upper table 4. FIG. 73 (e) is a diagram showing the upper table 5. FIG. 73 (f) is a diagram showing the upper table 6. FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing a middle order table. FIG. 74B shows a lower table.

  In the reference destination determination table, the reference destination of the combination of the jackpot, no SP reach effect development, and no SPSP reach effect development is the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 1, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 7999.

  The reference destination of the combination of the jackpot, the SP reach production development, and the SPSP reach production development is the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 2, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 9999.

  The combination of the jackpot, no SP-reach effect development, and the SPSP-reach effect development is referred to the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 3, the middle table, and the lower table is a number in the range of 3001 to 13599.

  The reference of the combination of the loss, no SP reach effect development and no SPSP reach effect development is the upper table 4, the middle table and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 4, the middle table, and the lower table is a number other than 3333 in the range of 3001 to 7999.

  The reference of the combination of the loss, the SP reach production development, and the SPSP reach production development is the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table. The result of addition of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 5, the middle table, and the lower table is a number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 9999. become.

  The reference to the combination of the loss, no SP reach effect development, and the SPSP reach effect development is referred to the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table. The addition result of the number of hundreds, the number of tens, and the number of ones determined by the upper table 6, the middle table, and the lower table is a number excluding 3333 and 7777 in the range of 3001 to 13599. become.

  More specifically, in FIG. 73, the options of the upper tables 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 include a number between 500 and 10000 in increments of 500, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 1, 1 to 25 effect random number values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 to 7500 and 3333. No effect random number 17 is associated with each number between 8000 and 10000 and 7777. In the upper table 2, 1 to 24 effect random number values 17 are associated with the respective numbers between 1500 to 9500, 3333, and 7777. None of the production random number values 17 are associated with 10,000. In the upper table 3, 1 to 24 effect random number values 17 are associated with the numbers, 3333, and 7777 between 1500 and 10000. In the upper table 4, 2 to 25 effect random number values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 7500. None of the effect random number 17 is associated with each of the numbers between 8000 and 10000, 3333 and 7777. In the upper table 5, 1 to 25 effect random number values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 9500. No random number 17 for effect is associated with 10,000, 3333, and 7777. In the upper table 6, 1 to 25 effect random number values 17 are associated with each number between 1500 and 10000. No effect random number 17 is associated with 3333 and 7777.

  In FIG. 74, the options in the middle table include a number between 50 and 150 in increments of 50. Each of these numbers is associated with 15 to 20 effect random number values 18. Some of the options in the lower table have a number between 1 and 99 excluding 33 and 77. Each of these numbers is associated with one or two effect random number values 19. Here, the upper tables 1, 2, and 3 are referred to, and if the number determined from the referenced tables 1, 2, or 3 is 3333 or 7777, the number determined from the middle table and the lower table is added. Instead, 3333 or 7777 will be the final score.

In step S1660-4, sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process of determining a gauge progress pattern in a gauge operation effect. Gauge progress pattern, the final stage determination process time _t in the gauge operation effect in case of a final acquisition points 100% as determined by _GG0, t _{GG1, t GG2,} t _{GG3, t GG4,} and progress ratio of _{t GG5} It shows. For example, the final acquisition point is 10000 points, the progress rate of the time _{t GG0 0%} progression rate of _{t GG1} 20%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG2} 30%, progress ratio of the time _{t GG3} 60% _{Assuming that} the progress rate at time t _GG4 is 90% and the progress rate at time t _GG5 is 100%, the mode of increase of the gauge progress amount is 0 (t _GG0 ) → 2000 (t _GG1 ) → 3000 (t _GG2 ) → 6000. (T _GG3 ) → 9000 (t _GG4 ) → 10000 (t _GG5 ). In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a determines the gauge development pattern with reference to the gauge operation effect progress mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a gauge operation effect progress mode determination table. The gauge operation effect progress mode determination table stores a set of the effect random number 20 and the gauge progress pattern. The options of the gauge operation effect progress state determination table include gauge progress patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14. In the gauge development patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14, the time t _GG0 and the time t _GG5 have a common progress ratio (time t _GG0 is 0% and time t _GG5 is 100%), and the times t _GG1 , t _GG2 , t _GG3, and progress percentage of _{t GG4} has become a different value. Each of the gauge development patterns GG11, GG12, GG13, and GG14 is associated with 25 effect random number values 20.

In step S1660-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the start time (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17) of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and determines this time as 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception effective period start timer counter for the gauge operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time _{tGG4 in} FIG. 13) of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception validity period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception validity period (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17), and the operation reception validity period end timer counter indicates the end time of the operation reception validity period (time in FIG. 17). t _GG4 ).

  In step S1660-6, sub CPU 120a sets a gauge operation effect standby flag in the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. The gauge operation effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the gauge operation effect is waiting to be executed.

  In step S1660-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an effect pattern specification command for specifying the final acquisition point determined in the final stage determination process and the gauge development pattern determined in the progress mode determination process, and sets the current gauge operation effect. The selection processing ends.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing details of the gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process (step S1662 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 76, the sub CPU 120a performs a gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination process (S1662-1). In the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 21 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether or not to execute the gauge operation specific announcement effect based on the combination of the final score and the effect random number 21.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination table, a set of the effect random number 21 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored in the final stage determination process (step S1660- in FIG. 70). In 3), a reference is made when 10,000 or more points are determined as final points, a point when 8000 to 9999 points are determined as final points, and a point less than 8000 is determined as final points. Are stored separately from those that are referred to when they are stored.

  Specifically, for 10,000 or more, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 21 indicate that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers 21 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is not executed. Regarding 8000 to 9999, data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) effect random numbers 21 execute a gauge operation specific announcement effect, and 80 (20 to 99) effect random numbers 21 for effecting the gauge operation It is associated with data indicating that the specific notice effect is not executed. For less than 8000, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is not executed. For less than 8000, no effect random number value 21 is associated with the data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is to be executed. With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 executes the gauge operation effect as an effect that can progress to a stage of 8000 points or more during the variable display of the symbol, the specific notice is issued before the execution of the gauge operation effect. It is possible to make a performance. Further, when the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot progress to a stage of 8000 points or more, the execution of the specific notice effect before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect is restricted.

  In step S1662-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the gauge operation specific announcement effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1662-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662-3. When the result of the determination is “do not execute” (S1662-2: No), the current gauge operation specific advance notice effect selection process ends.

  In step S1662-3, sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the gauge operation specific announcement effect, sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current gauge operation specific announcement effect selection process. To end.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing details of the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 78, the sub CPU 120a performs a timing operation effect execution determination process (S1663-1). In the timing operation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 22 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect execution determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and performs the timing operation effect based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 22. Is determined.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a timing operation effect execution determination table. In the timing operation effect execution determination table, the combination of the effect random number 22 and the data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is different from the one referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit. Are stored separately for those to be referred to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 55 (0 to 54) effect random numbers 22 indicate that a timing operation effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random numbers 22 have a timing effect. It is associated with data indicating that the operation effect is not executed. As for the loss, the data indicating that 45 (0 to 44) effect random numbers 22 execute the timing operation effect, and the 55 (45 to 99) effect random number 22 do not execute the timing operation effect. Is associated with the data indicating the fact.

  In step S1663-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the timing operation effect execution determination processing is “execute” or “not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1663-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1663-3. When the determination result is “do not execute” (S1663-2: No), the current timing operation effect selection process ends.

In step S1663-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process for determining a progress pattern of the timing operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a notification mode of an operation result that progresses when an operation in accordance with the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , t _{TM4 in} FIG. 17) is performed. Things. In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 23 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the timing operation effect progress mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and determines whether the SP start reach effect indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer has developed, whether the SPSP reach effect has progressed, and a random number value for the effect. A progress pattern of the timing operation effect is determined based on the 23 combinations.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a timing operation effect progress mode determination table. In the timing operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 23 and the progress pattern is stored for each combination corresponding to the combination of the presence or absence of the SP reach effect and the presence or absence of the SPSP reach effect.

An option corresponding to a combination of no SP reach effect development and no SPSP reach effect development in this table includes a progress pattern TM11. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random numbers 23 are associated with the progress pattern TM11. In progress pattern TM11, appearance timing _t TM1 of fourth of performance button 35 image manipulation timing of pressing across multiple Upon completing the operation (performance button 35 from _{first, t TM2, t TM3, t} TM4 ), A character image of “EXCELLENT” appears. Also, if the single operation succeeds, a character image of “GOOD” appears each time the operation succeeds, and if the single operation fails, a character image of “miss” appears each time the operation fails. Further, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, all subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM11, even if the operation is completed, the progress notification image (the character image of “SP”) does not appear.

  The options corresponding to the combination with SP reach effect development and no SPSP reach effect development in this table include progress patterns TM11 and TM12. Forty-five (0-44) effect random numbers 23 are associated with the progress pattern TM11, and 55 (45-99) effect random numbers 23 are associated with the progress pattern TM12. . In the progress pattern TM12, when the operation is completed, a character image of "EXCELLENT" appears. Also, if the single operation succeeds, a character image of “GOOD” appears each time the operation succeeds, and if the single operation fails, a character image of “miss” appears each time the operation fails. Further, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, all subsequent operations are invalidated. Further, in the progress pattern TM12, unlike the progress pattern TM11, when the operation is completed, a progress notification image (a character image of “SP”) appears.

  In this table, options corresponding to the combination of no SP reach effect development and a combination of SPSP reach effect development include progress patterns TM11 and TM12. 55 (0-54) effect random numbers 23 are associated with the progress pattern TM11, and 45 (55-99) effect random numbers 23 are associated with the progress pattern TM12. .

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables the display of the development notification image after the completion of the operation when the fluctuation leads to the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect. In addition, in the case where there is no development to either the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the fluctuation, the display of the development notification image after the operation is completed is restricted.

In step S1663-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18) of the first image of the effect button 35 within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and calculates this time as 2 millimeters. The value divided by the second is set in the timing operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the second image of the effect button 35 within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (2) in the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM3 in} FIG. 18) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (3) of the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The timing operation determination time (4) of the sub RAM 120c is set in the timer counter.

The timing operation determination time (1) the timer counter, the timing operation determination time (2) the timer counter, the timing operation determination time (3) the timer counter, and the timing operation determination time (4) execute the timer update process in step S1500. Counted down every time. The timing operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18), and the timing operation determination time (2) the timer counter Becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the second image (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), and the timing operation determination time (3) indicates the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 (time in FIG. 18). At time t _TM3 ), it becomes 0, and the timing operation determination time (4) timer counter becomes 0 at the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18).

In step S1663-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the time of completion of the pentagon having the image of the effect button 35 as the vertex (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. Is set in the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the timing operation effect in the sub RAM 120c. The operation reception valid period end timer counter is decremented every time the timer updating process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the time when the pentagon is completed (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18).

  In step S1663-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the timing operation effect standby flag in the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The timing operation effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the timing operation effect is waiting.

  In step S1663-7, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current timing operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing details of the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 81, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not reach is established by the fluctuation (S1664-1). When reach is established by the fluctuation (S1664-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1664-2. If reach is not established due to the fluctuation (S1664-1: No), the present reach back button operation effect selection process ends.

In step S1664-2, the sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process for determining the progress pattern of the back button operation effect. The progress pattern indicates a mode of notification of an operation result that progresses when an operation is performed in accordance with the reach establishment timing _tNR . In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 24 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and, based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 24, based on the reach. The progress pattern of the back button operation effect is determined.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table. In the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 24 and the progress pattern is stored separately for those to be referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those to be referred to when the big hit is lost. I have.

Options corresponding to the jackpot in this table include progress patterns RC11, RC12, and RC13. Ten (0 to 9) effect random numbers 24 are associated with the progress pattern RC11, and 70 (10 to 79) effect random numbers 24 are associated with the progress pattern RC12. , 20 (80 to 99) effect random numbers 24 are associated with the development pattern RC13. Progress pattern RC11, RC12, and RC13 are back button presence or absence of an output of the operation success sound when a successful back button operation (when the operation timing of the operation button 35 is matched with the timing t _NR of formation of reach), and operation (When the operation timing of the operation button 35 does not match the reach establishment timing _tNR ), the presence or absence of an image display indicating that is different.

  More specifically, in the progress pattern RC11, when the back button operation is successful, a back button operation success sound is output. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC12, the back button operation success sound is not output regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC13, when the back button operation is successful, a back button operation success sound is output. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RC13, if the operation fails, a character image of “sorry” is displayed.

  The options corresponding to the loss in this table include the progress patterns RC12 and RC14. Eighty (0 to 79) effect random numbers 24 are associated with the progress pattern RC12, and twenty (80 to 99) effect random numbers 24 are associated with the progress pattern RC14. I have. In the progress pattern RC14, the back button operation success sound is not output regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. If the back button operation fails, a character image of “sorry” is displayed. In the progress pattern RC14, if the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 can output the back button operation success sound when the change is to be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the big hit. Further, when the change is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss, the output of the back button operation success sound is regulated regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

  Here, comparing the above-described timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80) and the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82), two progresses are included in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table. There are patterns TM11 and TM12, and in each of these two development patterns TM11 and TM12, when a single operation fails, a "miss" character image indicating the failure is displayed. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation production progress mode determination table, only the progress patterns RC13 and RC14 of the four progress patterns RC11, RC12, RC13, and RC14 indicate the character “sorry” indicating that when the operation fails. An image is displayed, and the selectivity of the development patterns RC13 and RC14 is as low as 20%. The reason for this is that if the character image of “regret” appears too frequently, the player can easily and successfully perform the back button operation, and the interest of the game is rather spoiled.

In step S1664-3, the sub CPU120a determines the remaining time before establishment time reach (time _{t NR} in FIG. 19) within the fluctuation period T of the fluctuation, sub a value obtained by dividing the time by two milliseconds RAM120c Is set to the reach back button determination time timer counter. The reach back button determination time timer counter is decremented each time the timer update processing in step S1500 is executed. The reach back button determination time timer counter becomes 0 at the time when the reach is established (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19).

In step S1664-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the time after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the reach is established within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation to the end time t ′ _{NR of the} reach back button operation acceptance valid period. and then obtains a remaining time until the time t _'NR, sets the remaining time value obtained by dividing by two milliseconds operation accepting validity end timer counter for reach back button operation effect of the sub RAM120c obtained. The operation reception valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is counted down every time the timer updating process is executed in step S1500. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 two seconds after the reach is established.

  In step S1664-5, the sub CPU 120a sets a reach back button operation effect standby flag in the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the reach back button operation effect is waiting.

  In step S1664-4, sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current reach back button operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing details of the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 in FIG. 47). In FIG. 83, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a step-up effect as a symbol change effect of the change (S1665-1). When executing the step-up effect (S1665-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-2. If the step-up effect is not to be executed (S1665-1: No), the current step-up back button operation effect selection process ends.

  In step S1665-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up effect in the fluctuation evolves to the normal stage 4. When the sub CPU 120a normally evolves to the stage 4 (S1665-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1665-3. If it does not normally develop to step 4 (S1665-2: No), the current step-up back button operation effect selection process ends.

In step S1665-3, sub CPU 120a performs a progress mode determination process. The progress mode determination process is a process for determining a progress pattern of the step-up back button operation effect. Progress pattern shows a notification manner of operation results progress as triggered by back button operation decision timing (time _t UR1 in FIG _{20, t UR2, t UR3,} t UR4) in the combined operation is performed . In the progress mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 25 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the jackpot determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the fluctuation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 25, The progress pattern of the step-up back button operation effect is determined.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table. In the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table, a set of the effect random number 25 and the progress pattern are stored separately for those that are referred to when the jackpot determination result is a big hit and those that are referred to when the big hit is lost. ing.

The options corresponding to the jackpot in this table include the progress patterns RU11, RU12, and RU13. Ten (0-9) effect random numbers 25 are associated with the progress pattern RU11, and 70 (10-79) effect random numbers 25 are associated with the progress pattern RU12. The development pattern RU13 is associated with 20 (80 to 99) effect random number values 25. Progress pattern RU11, RU12, and RU13, when a successful back button operation (when the operation timing of the plurality of operation performance button 35 is fit with all the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) the presence or absence of the display of the back button operation successful image, and when it fails to operate the that in (when the operation timing of the performance button 35 has not match with any of the determination timing _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , t UR4) The presence or absence of the displayed image is different.

  More specifically, in the progress pattern RU11, if the back button operation is successful, a back button operation success image is displayed. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU12, a successful back button operation image is not displayed regardless of whether the back button operation is successful or not. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, when the back button operation is successful, a back button operation success image is displayed. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU13, if the operation fails, a character image of "sorry" is displayed.

  Options corresponding to the loss in this table include the progress patterns RU12 and RU14. Eighty (0 to 79) effect random numbers 25 are associated with the progress pattern RU12, and twenty (80 to 99) effect random numbers 25 are associated with the progress pattern RU14. I have. In the progress pattern RU14, the back button operation success image is not displayed regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation. If the effect button 35 is kept pressed, all subsequent operations are invalidated. In the progress pattern RU14, if the operation fails, a character image of "sorry" is displayed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120, when executing the step-up back button operation effect, when it is supposed to stop at the symbol corresponding to the big hit in the variable display, the back button operation success image Display is enabled. Further, in the case where the display is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss in the change display, the display of the back button operation success image is restricted regardless of the success or failure of the back button operation.

  Here, comparing the above-described timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80) and the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84), there are two timing operation effect progress mode determination tables. There are progress patterns TM11 and TM12, and in each of these two progress patterns TM11 and TM12, when a single operation fails, a "miss" character image indicating the failure is displayed. On the other hand, in the reach back button operation production progress mode determination table, only the progress patterns RU13 and RU14 of the four progress patterns RU11, RU12, RU13, and RU14 indicate the character of "regret" indicating that when the operation fails. An image is displayed, and the selectivity of the development patterns RU13 and RU14 is as low as 20%. The reason for this is that if the character image of “regret” appears too frequently, the player can easily and successfully perform the back button operation, and the interest of the game is rather spoiled.

In step S1665-4, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds. The set value is set in the back button operation determination time (1) timer counter of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value in the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (2) Set to timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value in the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (3) Set to timer counter. The sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) within the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value in the sub RAM 120c. Back button operation determination time (4) Set to timer counter.

The back button operation determination time (1) timer counter, back button operation determination time (2) timer counter, back button operation determination time (3) timer counter, and back button operation determination time (4) The timer counter is the timer of step S1500. It is counted down every time the update process is executed. The back button operation determination time (1) timer counter becomes 0 at the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20), and the back button operation determination time (2) timer counter It becomes 0 at the back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20), and the back button operation determination time (3) timer counter becomes 0 at the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20). That is, the back button operation determination time (4) The timer counter becomes 0 at the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20).

In step S1665-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time up to the execution time (time t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20) of the step effect in the normal stage 4 of the step-up effect within the change time T of the change, and _obtains the obtained remaining time. Is set to the operation reception effective period end timer counter for effecting the step-up back button operation in the sub RAM 120c in the sub RAM 120c. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is counted down every time the timer updating process is executed in step S1500. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 (time t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20).

  In step S1665-6, the sub CPU 120a sets the step-up back button operation effect standby flag in the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The step-up back button operation effect wait flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the step-up back button operation effect is waiting.

  In step S1665-7, sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command indicating the progress pattern determined in the progress mode determination process in the transmission buffer, and ends the current back button operation effect selection process.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the big hit that has triggered the special game this time is the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1). When the type of the jackpot is the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. When it is not the 2R probability change hit (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

  In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the big hit that has triggered the current special game is the 16R certain change hit. When the type of the jackpot is the 16R probability change hit (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not the 16R probability change (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

  In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of the jackpot that has triggered the special game this time is the 8R probability change hit. When the type of the jackpot is the 8R probability change hit (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. If it is 8R normal winning (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

  In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the successful promotion effect, and stores the promotion effect execution data indicating that the successful promotion effect is to be executed in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. I do.

  In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the promotion failure effect, and stores the promotion effect execution data indicating that the promotion failure effect is to be performed in the effect information storage area for each round of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. I do.

  After execution of step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform an opening effect per 8R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

  In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designation command of the opening effect determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. After that, the current special game selection process ends.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing details of the round effect control process (step S1693 in FIG. 48). In FIG. 86, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). If the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2. If it is a round other than the fourth round (S1693-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1963-6.

  In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the promotion effect execution data is stored in the effect information storage area for each round of the sub RAM 120c. When the promotion effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. When the promotion effect execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-6.

  In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the promotion effect execution data in the round effect information storage area indicates execution of the promotion success effect or execution of the promotion failure effect. If the promotion effect execution data indicates execution of the promotion success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. When the promotion effect execution data indicates execution of the promotion failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

  In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets the promotion successful effect standby flag in the promotion effect successful standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and proceeds to step S1693-5. The promotion success effect waiting flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the promotion success effect is waiting.

In step S1693-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance effective period of the continuous hit operation in the round game of the current round (the fourth round). Divided by 2 milliseconds is set in the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the promotion effect in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time (time t _{RDE in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance effective period of the promotion effect in the current round game, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value obtained by dividing the time by the sub RAM 120c. Is set to the operation reception validity period end timer counter for the promotion effect. The operation reception valid period start timer counter and the operation reception valid period end timer counter are decremented each time the timer update process in step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the continuous tapping operation. The operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time (time t _{RDE in} FIG. 21) of the operation reception valid period of the continuous tapping operation.

  In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designation command of the round effect of the current round in the transmission buffer.

  FIGS. 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 45). In FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation information storage area update process. The operation information storage area update processing is processing for updating information in the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  FIG. 94A shows the operation information storage area. FIG. 94B is a diagram illustrating an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 94A, the operation information storage area includes an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a center key. It has a sampling signal storage area, an effect button sampling signal storage area, an effect button on edge storage area, an effect button off edge storage area, an effect button off edge number storage area, and an effect button on-off edge signal number storage area. .

  Each of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge number storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area each include information on the latest sampling timing. And a pre-sampling storage unit for storing information of the immediately preceding (2 msec) sampling timing.

  In the operation information storage area update processing, the sub CPU 120a updates the up cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the up cursor key 39A. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the down cursor key 39B, the down cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Also, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D. Also, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area are updated. I do.

  More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 ms, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. For example, 0 is written in the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written in the central key sampling signal storage area.

  The sub CPU 120a stores the information of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on-edge storage area, the effect button off-edge storage area, and the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area in the previous sampling storage unit. Copy each one. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 94B, if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a If the input signal is OFF, 0 is written to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the previous sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on-edge signal storage area, and other combinations If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 0, the effect button on-edge signal storage area Is written to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the previous sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off-edge signal storage area, and other combinations If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the effect button off-edge signal storage area Is written to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage section of the production button sampling signal storage area, the number of the latest sampling storage section in the production button on-off edge signal number storage area is rewritten to +1 and the production button sampling is performed. When 0 is written to the latest sampling storage section of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage section of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is reset to 0.

  In step S1702 in FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a dialog operation effect standby flag is set in the dialog operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The serif operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the serif operation effect selecting process (step S1654 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change that the change operation effect is to be executed. When the dialogue operation effect standby flag is set (S1702: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. If the line operation effect standby flag is not set (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{SR1 in} FIG. 15) of the operation acceptance effective period of the line operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the dialogue operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the line operation effect (time t _{SR1 to} t _{SR2 in} FIG. 15), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the line operation effect (FIG. 15) At time t _SR2 ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 0 has been written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

  In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation result notification designation command for instructing the progress of the notification of the operation result in the line operation effect, and proceeds to step S1707. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive device 33 a , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the dialog operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1708.

  In step S1708 of FIG. 87, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the roulette operation effect standby flag is set in the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The roulette operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined in the roulette operation effect selection process (step S1659 of FIG. 47) that the roulette operation effect is to be executed at the start of the change. If the roulette operation effect standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. If the roulette operation effect standby flag has not been set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period start timer counter for roulette operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the roulette operation effect (time t _{RL1 in} FIG. 16), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1713.

In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period end timer counter for roulette operation effect is 0. Within operation accepting lifetime of roulette operation effect (time t _{RL1 ~t} RL2 in Fig. _16), in this step the determination result is "No", the end time of the operation acceptance lifetime roulette operation effect (in FIG. 16 At time t _RL2 ), the result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1711: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. If 0 has been written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation result notification designation command for instructing progress to notification of the operation result in the roulette operation effect, and proceeds to step S1713. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a perform the effect (FIG. 16) relating to the display of the roulette appearance. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a clears the roulette operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1714.

  In step S1714 in FIG. 88, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a gauge operation effect standby flag is set in the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. The gauge operation effect waiting flag is set when it is determined that the gauge operation effect is to be executed in the gauge operation effect selection process (step S1660 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change. If the gauge operation effect standby flag is set (S1714: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1715. When the gauge operation effect standby flag is not set (S1714: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1715, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period start timer counter for gauge operation effect is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the gauge operation effect (time t _{GG3 in} FIG. 17), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1715: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1716. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1715: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the gauge operation effect is 0. Within operation accepting validity of the gauge operation effect (time t _{GG3 ~t} GG4 of Fig. _17), in this step the determination result is "No", the end time of the operation acceptance lifetime gauge operation effect (in FIG. 17 At time t _GG4 ), the result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1716: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1716: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1718.

  In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. If 0 has been written (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1718, sub CPU 120a sets an operation result notification designation command for instructing the progress of notification of the operation result in the gauge operation effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1719. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the operation result notification designation command, the image display device 31 and the sound output device perform effects (FIG. 17) relating to the re-rise of the gauge development amount and the display of the final score. 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a clears the gauge operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1720 of FIG. 89, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect standby flag is set in the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. The timing operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined that the timing operation effect is to be executed in the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47) at the start of the fluctuation. When the timing operation effect standby flag is set (S1720: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1721. If the timing operation effect standby flag has not been set (S1720: No), the flow proceeds to step S1736.

In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. Until the time of completion of the pentagon of the image of the effect button 35 in the timing operation effect (time t _{TM5 in} FIG. 18), the determination result in this step is “No”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1721: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1722. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1721: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0 or not. Until the appearance timing of the fourth image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing operation effect determination time (4) the timer counter is not 0 (S1722: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1723. Timing operation effect determination time (4) When the timer counter is 0 (S1722: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1723, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0 or not. Until the appearance timing of the third image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM3 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing operation effect determination time (3) the timer counter is not 0 (S1723: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1724. Timing operation effect determination time (3) When the timer counter is 0 (S1723: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1724, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the timing operation effect is zero. Until the appearance timing of the second image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM2 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing operation effect determination time (2) timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725. Timing operation effect determination time (2) When the timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1725, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing operation effect determination time (1) timer counter for the timing operation effect is 0. Until the appearance timing of the first image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _{TM1 in} FIG. 18), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timing operation effect determination time (1) is not 0 (S1725: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727. Timing operation effect determination time (1) When the timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1726.

In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. I do. At the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 of the timing operation effect (time t _TM1 , t _TM2 , t _TM3 , or t _{TM4 in} FIG. 18), if the effect button 35 is continuously operated for one second or more, this The determination result of the step is “Yes”. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or more than the predetermined value (S1726: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1735. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1726: No), the process proceeds to step S1727.

  In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If 1 has been written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. If 0 has been written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1736.

  In step S1728, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35 and the first image, the second image, the third image, and the fourth image of the effect button 35. The time difference between each appearance timing and each occurrence timing is obtained, and if any of the obtained time differences is less than a predetermined reference value, it is determined that the operation has succeeded.

  In step S1729, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination processing in step S1728 indicates that the operation was successful. If the operation has failed (S1729: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1730. If the operation is successful (S1729: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1730, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1736. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the failure designation command, the effect (FIG. 18) relating to the display of the character image of “miss” is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect driving device 33 a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

In step S1731, the sub CPU120a updates the successful operation number _{N TM} timing operation success number storage area of the sub RAM120c by +1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1732.

In step S1732, the sub CPU120a judges whether or not the operation succeeds number _{N TM} updated reaches 4. Sub CPU120a, when the operation succeeds number _{N TM} has not reached at 4 (S1732: No), the process proceeds to step S1733. If the operation succeeds number _{N TM} reaches 4 (S1732: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1734.

  In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets a success designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1736. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the effect (FIG. 18) relating to the display of the character image of “GOOD” is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect driving device 33 a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a completion designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 over a plurality of times matches all of the four appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35, Proceed to step S1736. This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the success designation command, the effect (FIG. 18) relating to the display of the character image “EXCELLENT” is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, and the effect driving device 33 a , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34. Further, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the timing operation effect selection process (step S1663 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change in the change, and the progress pattern TM12 in the timing operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 80). Is determined, the effect relating to the display of the character image of "SP" (FIG. 18) is executed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a and 33b, and the effect lighting device 34. Let it.

  In step S1735, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1736.

  Here, in the timing operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times) before and after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, a plurality of operations are performed. If none of the operation timings coincides with the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the processing proceeds from S1727: Yes to S1728 to S1729: No to S1730 after the processing in S1720 to S1726 for each operation. The character image of "Miss" is displayed. If any operation timing of the plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of step S1729 is “Yes” at that time. Thereafter, when the processing proceeds in the order of S1731 → S1732: No → S1733, a character image of “GOOD” is displayed. When the process proceeds from S1731 to S1732: Yes to S1734, a character image of "EXCELLENT" is displayed.

  When the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of step S1726 becomes “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S1735 to clear the timing operation effect standby flag. Is done. After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1720 is “No”, and any character image of “Miss”, “GOOD”, and “EXCELLENT” is displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 35. Disappears.

  According to such a flow of processing, when the effect control board 120 executes the timing operation effect, the operation on the effect button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations is When the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 matches, the effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the appearance timing (the effect of displaying a character image of “GOOD” or “EXCELLENT”) ) Can be executed. In addition, when the operation timing of any of the plurality of operations does not match the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, an effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the appearance timing. (The effect of displaying a character image of “GOOD” or “EXCELLENT”) is controlled, and the effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode according to the mismatch between the operation timing and the appearance timing (character of “mis”) (The effect of displaying an image). When the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the execution of the effect itself for notifying the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the effect itself that notifies the operation result can be executed.

  In step S1736 in FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set in the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The reach back button operation effect standby flag is set when it is determined to execute the reach back button operation effect in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change. Things. When the reach back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1736: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1737. If the reach back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1736: No), the process proceeds to step S1746.

In step S1737, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. Until the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the reach back button operation (one second after the reach establishment time _tNR in FIG. 19), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1737: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1738. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1737: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

In step S1738, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the reach back button determination time timer counter for the reach back button operation effect is 0. Until the reaching timing (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19), the determination result of this step is “No”. When the reach back button determination time timer counter is 0 (S1738: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1739. When the reach back button determination time timer counter is not 0 (S1738: No), the process proceeds to step S1740.

In step S1739, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. I do. At the timing of reaching the reach (time t _{NR in} FIG. 19), if the effect button 35 is continuously operated for one second or more, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1739: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1740. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1739: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1745.

  In step S1740, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 has been written to the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-edge storage area. If the effect button 35 has just been pressed, the determination result in this step is “Yes”. If the effect button 35 has not been pressed or has been continuously operated (pressed), The determination result of this step is “No”. When 1 has been written (S1740: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1741. If 0 has been written (S1740: No), the process proceeds to step S1745.

  In step S1741, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether the current operation is successful. In the operation determination process, the sub CPU 120a obtains a time difference between the operation timing of the present operation of the effect button 35 and the timing of the establishment of the reach. If the obtained time difference is less than a predetermined reference value, it is determined that the operation has succeeded, and If so, the operation fails.

  In step S1742, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the result of the operation determination process in step S1741 is an operation success. If the operation has failed (S1742: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1743. If the operation has succeeded (S1742: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1744.

  In step S1743, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 did not match the reach establishment timing in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1746. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change, progress in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82). When the pattern RC13 or RC14 is determined, when the failure designation command is received, the effect relating to the display of the character image of “sorry” is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, and The effect lighting device 34 is executed.

  In step S1744, the sub CPU 120a sets a success designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 matches the timing of establishing the reach in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1745. This success designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, in the reach back button operation effect selection process (step S1664 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change, progress in the reach back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 82). When the pattern RC11 or RC13 is determined, when the success designation command is received, the effect (FIG. 19) relating to the output of the voice “Transcendence is cute” is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the production drive device 33a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1745, the sub CPU 120a clears the reach back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1746.

  Here, in the reach back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times) before and after the reach is established, among the multiple operations, If none of the operation timings coincides with the timing of the establishment of the reach, the processing proceeds from S1736 to Yes, S1741 to S1742, and No to S1743 after the processing in S1736 to S1739 for each operation. An image can be displayed. If any of the operation timings of the plurality of operations matches the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result of S1742 is "Yes" at that time and the process proceeds to step S1744, and the voice of "Transcendence cute" is output. Can be output.

  If the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the timing of the establishment of the reach, the determination result of step S1739 becomes “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S1745 to clear the timing operation effect standby flag. . After the timing operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1736 is “No”, and regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the display of the character image of “regretful” and the output of the voice of “transcendence cute” Will not be.

  According to such a processing flow, when performing the timing operation effect, the effect control board 120 performs the operation on the effect button 35 a plurality of times, and reaches the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations. When the timing of the establishment of the operation matches with the timing of the establishment of the reach, it is possible to execute an effect that notifies the operation result in an effect mode corresponding to the timing of the establishment of the reach (the effect of outputting the voice of “transcendence cute”). And In addition, when the operation timing of any one of the plurality of operations does not match the reach establishment timing, an effect of notifying the operation result in an effect mode according to the operation timing and the reach establishment timing being matched. An effect that regulates the execution of (the effect of outputting the sound of “transcendence cute”) and notifies the operation result in an effect mode according to the inconsistency of the operation timing and the timing of reaching (the character image of “sorry”) ) Can be performed. In addition, when the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the timing of the establishment of the reach, the execution of the effect itself to notify the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the timing of the establishment of the reach, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

  In step S1746 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set in the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The step-up back button operation effect wait flag is set when the step-up back button operation effect is determined to be executed in the step-up back button operation effect selection process (step S1665 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change. It is set. When the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is set (S1746: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1747. If the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is not set (S1746: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

In step S1747, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the execution time of the step effect of the normal stage 4 in the step-up effect (time t _{SUP4 in} FIG. 20), the determination result of this step is “No”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1747: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1748. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1747: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1760.

In step S1748, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) timer counter for step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the fourth back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR4 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timer counter is not 0 (S1748: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1749. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (4) If the timer counter is 0 (S1748: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1749, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the third back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR3 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timer counter is not 0 (S1749: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1750. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (3) If the timer counter is 0 (S1749: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1750, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) timer counter for the step-up back button operation effect is 0. Until the second back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR2 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. When the timer counter is not 0 (step S1750: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1751. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (2) If the timer counter is 0 (S1750: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1751, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the step-up back button operation effect determination time for step-up back button operation effect (1) timer counter is 0 or not. Until the first back button operation determination timing (time t _{UR1 in} FIG. 20) of the step-up back button operation effect, the determination result of this step is “No”. If the timer counter is not 0 (S1751: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1753. Step-up back button operation effect determination time (1) If the timer counter is 0 (S1751: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1752.

In step S1752, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. I do. Step-up back button operation decision timing (time _{t UR1, t UR2, t UR3} , or _{t UR4)} in, if it is continuously operated performance button 35 for more than 1 second, the determination result of this step is "Yes" Becomes When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or more than the predetermined value (S1752: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1760. When the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1752: No), the process proceeds to step S1753.

  In step S1753, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If the effect button 35 has just been pressed, the determination result in this step is “Yes”. If the effect button 35 has not been pressed or has been continuously operated (pressed), The determination result of this step is “No”. When 1 has been written (S1753: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1754. If 0 has been written (S1753: No), the process proceeds to step S1761.

  In step S1754, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation determination process. The operation determination process is a process of determining whether the current operation is successful. In the operation determination processing, the sub CPU 120a calculates a time difference between the operation timing of the current operation of the effect button 35 and each of the four back button operation determination timings, and if any of the calculated time differences is smaller than a predetermined reference value, If the value is less than the reference value, the operation is successful.

  In step S1755, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the determination result of the operation determination processing in step S1754 is successful. If the operation has failed (S1755: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1756. If the operation is successful (S1755: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1775.

  In step S1756, the sub CPU 120a sets a failure designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 did not match the back button operation determination timing in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1761. This failure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing of step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the step-up back button operation effect selection processing (step S1665 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84). When the failure designating command is received when the progress pattern RU13 or RU14 of is determined, the effect relating to the display of the character image of “sorry” is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive devices for effect 33a, 33b. , And the effect lighting device 34 are executed.

In step S1775, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of successful operations N _UR of the number of successful back button operations storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1758.

In step S1758, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the number of successful operations N _UR after the update has reached 4 or not. If the number of successful operations N _UR has not reached 4 (S1758: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1759. If the number of successful operations N _UR has reached 4 (S1758: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1761.

  In step S1759, the sub CPU 120a sets in the transmission buffer a completion designation command indicating that the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 over a plurality of times matches all four back button operation determination timings, and proceeds to step S1761. . This completion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. The image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 perform the step-up back button operation effect selection processing (step S1665 in FIG. 47) at the start of the change in the step-up back button operation effect progress mode determination table (FIG. 84). When the success designating command is received when the progress pattern RU11 or RU13 of is determined, the effect (FIG. 20) relating to the display of the character image of "congratulations" is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive for effect. The devices 33a and 33b and the lighting device for effect 34 are executed.

  In step S1760, sub CPU 120a clears the step-up back button operation effect standby flag storage area in sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1761.

  Here, in the step-up back button operation effect, for example, when the player performs a continuous hit operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35 multiple times) before and after the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, If none of the operation timings of the two operations coincides with the step-up back button operation determination timing, after each of the operations in steps S1746 to S1752, the processing proceeds to S1753: Yes → S1754 → S1755: No → S1756. If the progress pattern is the progress pattern RU13 or RU14, a character image of "sorry" can be displayed. If any operation timing of the plurality of operations matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the determination result of S1755 is “Yes” at that time. Thereafter, when the processing proceeds in the order of S1775 → S1758: Yes → S1759, a character image of “congratulations” can be displayed when the current production pattern is the development pattern RC11 or RC13.

  Also, when the player keeps pressing the effect button 35 before the appearance of the image of the effect button 35, the determination result in step S1752 becomes “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S1760 to wait for the step-up back button operation effect standby. The flag is cleared. After the step-up back button operation effect standby flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1746 is "No", and any character image of "regretful" and "congratulations" is displayed regardless of the operation of the effect button 35. Disappears.

  According to such a processing flow, when the effect control board 120 executes the step-up back button operation effect, the operation on the effect button 35 is performed a plurality of times, and the operation of any one of the plurality of operations is performed. When the timing matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, an effect that notifies the operation result in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing (displays a “congratulations” character image) Effect). If the operation timing of any of the multiple operations does not match the step-up back button operation determination timing, the operation result is displayed in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing. The effect of regulating the execution of the effect to be notified (the effect of displaying the character image of “congratulations”) and notifying the operation result in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the step-up back button operation determination timing (“Sorry, (The effect of displaying a character image of "). In addition, when the operation on the effect button 35 is performed for a predetermined period (1 second) or more including the step-up back button operation determination timing, the execution of the effect itself to notify the operation result is restricted. Further, when the start timing of the continuous operation of the effect button 35 matches the step-up back button operation determination timing, the effect itself for notifying the operation result can be executed.

  In step S1761 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the first accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the first accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The first character operation effect standby flag is set when a pattern fluctuation effect pattern including the first character operation effect is selected in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process at the start of the fluctuation (step S1644 in FIG. 46). Is what is done. When the first accessory operation rendering standby flag is set (S1761: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1762. If the first role item operation effect standby flag has not been set (S1761: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1762, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period start timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{AY1 in} FIG. 10) of the operation reception validity period for the first role item operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1762: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1763. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1762: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

In step S1763, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the first accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception valid period of the first role item operation effect (time t _{AY1 to} t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the operation reception valid period of the first character item operation effect is At the end time (time t _{AY2 in} FIG. 10), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1763: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1764. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1763: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1765.

  In step S1764, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1764: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1765. If 0 has been written (S1764: No), the process proceeds to step S1767.

  In step S1765, sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation result notification designation command for instructing the progress of notification of the operation result in the first accessory operation effect, and proceeds to step S1766. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. In the fluctuation effect pattern determination process at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation (step S1644 in FIG. 46), when the symbol fluctuation effect pattern including the first character operation operation effect with the character falling is selected, the image control board 150 and When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification designation command, the lamp control board 140 converts the effect (FIG. 10A) relating to the fall of the first movable auditorium 330 a into the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive device 33 a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1766, the sub CPU 120a clears the first character operation effect rendering standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1767.

  In step S1767 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the second accessory operation effect standby flag is set in the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The second character operation effect standby flag is set when a pattern fluctuation effect pattern including the second character operation effect is selected in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process at the start of the fluctuation (step S1644 in FIG. 46). It is set. When the second character operation effect rendering standby flag is set (S1767: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1768. If the second accessory operation effect standby flag has not been set (S1767: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1768, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception effective period start timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11) of the operation reception validity period for the second role item operation effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1768: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1679. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1768: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1679, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception validity period end timer counter for the second accessory operation effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception validity period of the second auditorium operation effect (time t _{SY1 to} t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “No”, and At the end time (time t _{SY2 in} FIG. 11), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1770: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1770. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1770: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1771.

  In step S1770, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If 1 has been written (S1770: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1771. If 0 has not been written (S1771: No), the process proceeds to step S1773.

  In step S1771, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation result notification designation command for instructing the progress of the notification of the operation result in the second accessory operation effect, and proceeds to step S1772. This operation result notification designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. In the fluctuation effect pattern determination process at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation (step S1644 in FIG. 46), when the symbol fluctuation effect pattern including the second character operation operation effect with the character tilt is selected, the image control board 150 When the lamp control board 140 receives the operation result notification specifying command, the lamp control board 140 converts the effect (FIG. 11A) relating to the tilt of the second movable role 330b into the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving device 33a. , 33b, and the lighting device for effect 34.

  In step S1772, sub CPU 120a clears the second accessory operation effect standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1773.

In step S1773 in FIG. 93, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period start timer counter for the promotion effect is 0. After the start time (time t _{RDS in} FIG. 21) of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hit effect in the promotion effect, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1773: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to Step S1774. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1773: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1774, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the promotion effect is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hitting operation of the promotion effect (time t _{RDS to} t _{RDE in} FIG. 21), the determination result of this step is “No”, and the end time of the operation acceptance valid period of the continuous hitting operation (FIG. 21) At time t _RDE ), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1774: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1775. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1774: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1780.

  In step S1775, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient for determining that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. I do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) for one second or more, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1775: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1776. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1775: Yes), the flow proceeds to step S1784.

  In step S1776, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage section of the effect button on-edge storage area. If immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When 1 has been written (S1776: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1777. If 0 has been written (S1776: No), the process proceeds to step S1784.

In step S1777, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of consecutive hits N _RD in the number of consecutive hits storage area of the sub RAM 120c by +1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1778.

In step S1778, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not updated number of consecutive hits N _RD has reached 30. If the number of presses of the effect button 35 after the display of the guidance image of “continuous hit!” Reaches 30 times, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. The determination result is “No”. Sub CPU120a, when repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has not reached 30 (S1778: No), the process proceeds to step S1779. If repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has reached 30 (S1778: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1780.

  In step S1779, sub CPU 120a sets the effect progress designation command in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. This effect progress designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. Upon receiving the effect progress designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute an effect of moving the gauge progress amount of the gauge image rightward by a predetermined amount.

  In step S1780, it is determined whether or not the promotion successful presentation standby flag is set in the promotion successful presentation standby flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. The promotion success rendering standby flag is set at the start of the round game of the fourth round in the special game of the 8R probability change jackpot. When the promotion success rendering standby flag is set (S1780: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1781. If the promotion success rendering standby flag has not been set (S1780: No), the flow proceeds to step S1784.

  In step S1781, the sub CPU 120a sets a promotion failure production designation command instructing execution of the promotion failure production in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1784. This promotion failure effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process in step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the promotion failure production designation command, the promotion failure production (FIG. 21B) is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the production drive devices 33a, 33b, And the lighting device for production 34 is executed.

  In step S1782, the sub CPU 120a sets a successful promotion effect designation command instructing execution of the successful promotion effect in the transmission buffer, and proceeds to step S1783. This promotion success effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the promotion success production designation command, the promotion success production (FIG. 21A) is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the production drive devices 33a, 33b, And the lighting device for production 34 is executed.

  In step S1783, the sub CPU 120a clears the promotion effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1784.

  In step S1784, the sub CPU 120a generates an operation designation command according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E, and sets the generated operation designation command in the transmission buffer. This operation designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output processing in step S1800. When receiving the operation designation command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute an effect according to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
First, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of operation effects (a first character operation effect, a second character operation effect, a serif operation effect, a roulette operation) that progress to the notification of the operation result triggered by the operation of the effect button 35 Effects, gauge operation effects, and timing operation effects), and one or more of these effects are executed as symbol variation effects. In addition, among the plurality of types of operation effects, in the first role operation effect, the second position operation effect, the line operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect, the jackpot determination result and the progress after the operation of the effect button 35 are performed. Regardless of the mode, a common normal notice effect (an effect of displaying a guide image or an indicator image that prompts the operation of the effect button 35) is executed, and thereafter, the first character operation effect and the second character operation An individual specific notice effect according to the mode of notification of each operation result of the effect, the line operation effect, the roulette operation effect, and the gauge operation effect can be executed. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the operation effect.

  Secondly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is configured to easily select a roulette operation effect when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of the plurality of types of effect modes of the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol. A roulette effect in which the result of the dialogue operation is “!”, And an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of the plurality of types of effect modes of the first accessory operation effect (the first character with a dropping role). In the case of executing the first role, the first announcement is performed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, and the specific announcement effect indicating the progress of the effect after the operation is performed. Prior to the operation of the effect button 35 in the operation effect, it is possible to execute a specific notice effect indicating a mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the case where the first character operation effect and the roulette operation effect are both executed during the variable display of the symbol.

  Thirdly, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is configured to easily select a serif operation effect (e.g., a character operation effect when a jackpot determination result is not a big hit among the effects of the plurality of effect modes of the line operation effect during the variable display of the symbol. An effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of the character A, B, and C as the dialogue of the dialogue in which the characters A, B, and C are the line speakers and the first character operation effect. In the case of executing a certain first character operation effect), the execution of the specific notice effect indicating the progress of the effect after the operation is controlled before the operation of the effect button 35 in the line operation effect, Prior to the operation of the effect button 35 in the one-character operation effect, it is possible to execute a specific announcement effect indicating a mode of progress of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the case where the first character operation effect and the line operation effect are both executed during the variable display of the symbol.

  Fourth, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 is configured to easily select the roulette operation effect (the roulette operation effect is easily selected when the jackpot determination result is not the big hit) among the effects of the plurality of effect modes of the roulette operation effect during the variable display of the symbol. A roulette effect in which a dialogue operation with “!” Is displayed, and an effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a large hit among the effects of a plurality of types of effect modes of the gauge operation effect (a gauge operation with a final score of 8000 or more). In the case where the effect is performed, the specific announcement effect indicating the progress of the effect after the operation is controlled before the operation of the effect button 35 in the roulette operation effect, and the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect is controlled. Before the operation, it is possible to execute a specific announcement effect indicating a mode of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game when both the gauge operation effect and the roulette operation effect are performed during the symbol change display.

  Fifth, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 120 performs the line operation effect that is easy to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not the big hit among the effects of the plurality of types of effect modes of the line operation effect during the variable display of the symbol. An effect that is difficult to be selected when the jackpot determination result is not a jackpot among the effects of the character A, B, and C as the dialog speakers and a plurality of types of effect modes of the gauge operation effect (the final score is 8000 or more). In the case of performing the gauge operation effect, the execution of the specific announcement effect indicating the progress of the effect after the operation is controlled before the operation of the effect button 35 in the line operation effect, and the effect in the gauge operation effect. Prior to the operation of the button 35, it is possible to execute a specific announcement effect indicating a mode of the effect after the operation. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in a case where both the gauge operation effect and the line operation effect are performed during the symbol change display.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the first embodiment, when a gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that can progress to a stage of 8000 points or more, a specific notice effect can be executed before execution of the gauge operation effect, and a stage of 8000 points or more can be executed. In the case where the gauge operation effect is executed as an effect that cannot be advanced to the point, it is regulated that the specific notice effect is executed before the execution of the gauge operation effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the final score is determined to be one of 7777 and 3333 (7777 in the example of FIG. 95 (d)) which is the jackpot determined point. When the gauge operation effect is executed, it is possible to execute the specific notice effect before executing the gauge operation effect. In other cases, the specific notice effect is restricted before the gauge operation effect is executed. .

  The contents of the gauge operation specific notice execution determination table referred to in step S1662-1 of the gauge operation specific notice effect selection process (FIG. 76) are different between the first embodiment and the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a gauge operation specific notice execution determination table. In the gauge operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table of this embodiment, a set of the effect random number 21 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is determined in the final stage determination process (FIG. 70). In step S1660-3), the reference is made when 7777 is set as the final acquisition point, the reference is made when 3333 is set as the final acquisition point, and the reference is made at other times. It is remembered.

  Specifically, for 7777, 55 (0 to 54) effect random number values 21 indicate that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is to be executed, and 45 (55 to 99) effect random number values 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific notice effect is not executed, respectively. Regarding 3333, the data indicating that 20 (0 to 19) effect random numbers 21 execute the gauge operation specific announcement effect, and the 80 (20 to 99) effect random number values 21 for the gauge operation specific announcement It is associated with data indicating that no effect is to be executed. Regarding points other than 7777 and 33333, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is not executed. Regarding points other than 7777 and 3333, no effect random number value 21 is associated with data indicating that the gauge operation specific announcement effect is to be executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 operates the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect when the gauge operation effect is to be executed, when the variation display is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , It is possible to execute a specific announcement effect indicating a mode of progress after the operation. In addition, when the variation display is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the losing, a specific announcement effect indicating a mode of progress after the operation is performed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the gauge operation effect. Regulate.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the case where the gauge operation effect is executed during the symbol change display.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first and second embodiments, when the second accessory operation effect is executed, the specific announcement effect can be executed regardless of whether the jackpot determination result is a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the execution of the specific announcement effect changes according to the jackpot determination result.

  In the first and second embodiments and the present embodiment, the contents of the second special property specifying notice effect execution determination table referred to in step S1652-1 of the second special property specifying notice effect selecting process (FIG. 57) are as follows. different. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a second character-specified advance announcement effect execution determination table. In the second character-specific announcement notice effect execution determination table of the present embodiment, a set of the effect random number 6 and data indicating the necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is developed as the jackpot determination result. Are stored separately for each combination corresponding to the presence / absence.

  In the combination in which the jackpot determination result in the table is “lost” and “with development”, 100 (0 to 99) effect random numbers 6 are associated with data indicating that the specific announcement effect is not executed. In addition, for the combination in which the jackpot determination result is lost and no development is made, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with data indicating that the specific announcement effect is not executed. If the jackpot determination result is a loss, no effect random number value 6 is associated with the data indicating that the specific announcement effect is to be executed.

  With such a configuration of the table, when the effect control board 120 is to execute the second character operation effect, when the change display is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the effect control board 120 performs the second character operation effect. Before the operation of the effect button 35 in, a specific notice effect indicating a mode of progress after the operation can be executed. In addition, when the variation display is to stop at the symbol corresponding to the loss, a specific notice effect indicating the progress after the operation is executed before the operation of the effect button 35 in the second character operation operation effect. To be regulated.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game in the case where the gauge operation effect is executed during the symbol change display.

  As described above, the first to third embodiments of the present invention have been described, but the following modifications may be added to such embodiments.

(1) In the first to third embodiments, the number of appearance timings (timings of pressing the effect button 35) of the image of the effect button 35 in the timing operation effect is four. However, the number of appearance timings of the image of the effect button 35 may be three or less, or may be five or more.

(2) In the first to third embodiments, the number of back button operation determination timings in the step-up back button operation effect is four. However, the number of back button operation determination timings may be three or less, or may be five or more.

(3) In the first to third embodiments, the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are developed from the normal reach effect. However, an effect that evolves from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect and from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect may be executed as the symbol variation effect.

(4) In the promotion effects of the first to third embodiments, the condition that the continuous hit operation is performed within the operation reception valid period of the continuous hit operation is set as a notification condition, and the number of continuous hits within the operation reception effective period is a predetermined number (30). Times), the promotion to a successful promotion or failed promotion. On the other hand, a plurality of continuous hit determination timings are provided within the operation acceptance valid period, and the effect button 35 is pressed at all or a part of the plurality of continuous hit determination timings (the effect button on-edge at the continuous hit determination timing). When the latest sampling signal storage unit in the storage area has a value of 1), the promotion may proceed to a successful promotion effect or a failed promotion effect. Further, in this case, when the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 and the continuous hit determination timing match, an effect that notifies the operation result in an effect mode according to the matching of the operation timing and the continuous hit determination timing (for example, “ (A display that displays a character image "Don Pisha"). When the operation timing of the operation of the effect button 35 does not match the continuous hit determination timing, an effect corresponding to the mismatch between the operation timing and the continuous hit determination timing. In this manner, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the operation result in an aspect (for example, an effect of displaying a character image of “no good”), and the operation on the effect button 35 is continuously performed over a predetermined period including the continuous hit determination timing. In the case of the operation, an effect to notify the operation result (for example, displaying a character image of “Don Pisha” or “No”) Out, promoted successful performance, and may be to restrict the execution of one or more of production) in the promotion failing game effect.

(6) In the timing operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. In this case, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area was 1 at two timings, a timing slightly before the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 and an appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35. In this case, it may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(7) In the reach back button operation effect of the first to third embodiments, when the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the timing of reaching reach is equal to or more than a predetermined value. Then, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the timing of the establishment of the reach, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, when the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings, a timing slightly before the timing of the establishment of the reach and a timing of the establishment of the reach, the reach is established. It may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated over a predetermined period including the timing of, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(8) In the step-up back button operation effect of the first to third embodiments, the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit in the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area at the appearance timing of the image of the effect button 35 is a predetermined value. In the case described above, it is considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and the execution of the operation result effect is restricted. However, when the value of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 at two timings, a timing slightly before the step-up back button operation determination timing and a step-up back button operation determination timing, Alternatively, it may be considered that the effect button 35 has been continuously operated for a predetermined period including the step-up back button operation determination timing, and the execution of the operation result effect may be restricted.

(9) The specific notice effect may be executed in the first accessory operation effect of the first to third embodiments after the start of the first accessory operation effect and the start of the operation acceptance valid period. It was the previous time. However, the execution time of the specific announcement effect of the first _accessory operation effect may be before the execution of the first _accessory operation effect itself during the change display of the symbol (before time _tAY0 in FIG. 10).

(10) The specific announcement effect may be executed in the second accessory operation effect of the first to third embodiments after the start of the second accessory operation effect and the start of the operation acceptance valid period. It was the previous time. However, the execution time of the specific notice effect of the second role operation effect may be before the execution of the second role operation effect itself during the change display of the symbol (before the time t _SY0 in FIG. 11).

(11) In the serif operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the specific announcement effect may be executed after the start of the line operation effect and before the start of the operation acceptance valid period. . However, the execution time of the specific announcement effect of the line operation effect may be before the start of execution of the line operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before the time t _SR0 in FIG. 15).

(12) In the roulette operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the specific announcement effect may be executed after the start of the roulette operation effect and before the start of the operation acceptance valid period. . However, the execution time of the specific announcement effect of the roulette operation effect may be before the start of the execution of the roulette operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbols (before the time _tLR0 in FIG. 16).

(13) In the gauge operation effects of the first to third embodiments, the specific notice effect may be executed after the start of the gauge operation effect and before the start of the operation reception validity period. . However, the execution time of the specific notice effect of the gauge operation effect may be before the start of execution of the gauge operation effect itself during the variable display of the symbol (before time _tGG0 in FIG. 17).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... First starting opening, 14a ... First starting opening detecting switch, 15 ... Second starting opening, 15a ... Second starting opening detecting switch, 16 ... First big winning opening, 16a: first big winning opening detection switch, 17: second big winning opening detection switch, 17a: second big winning opening detection switch, 20: first special symbol display device, 21: second special symbol display device, 31: image display Apparatus, 110: Main control board, 110a: Main CPU, 110b: Main ROM, 110c: Main RAM, 120: Production control board, 120a: Sub CPU, 120b: Sub ROM, 120c: Sub RAM, 150: Image control board

Claims (1)

Operating means;
Determining means for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by the establishment of the starting condition;
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, after the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display unit, a symbol display control unit for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result,
When the determination unit determines that the jackpot has been won, after the symbol display control unit stops displaying the symbol, a special game execution unit that executes a special game corresponding to the won jackpot,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a stage operation effect in which a stage effect progresses in accordance with a predetermined operation on the operation unit within an operation reception valid period, and a predetermined operation on the operation unit within the operation reception valid period A non-step operation effect in which an effect different from the step effect is developed in response thereto, a first specific notice effect indicating a mode of progress of the effect after the operation in the step operation effect, and after the operation in the non-step operation effect A second specific notice effect that suggests a mode of progress of the effect, and effect control means for causing the effect means to execute one or a plurality of effects among a plurality of effects,
When the determination result is a jackpot, the step operation effect is easier to be selected than the non-step operation effect, and when the determination result is not a jackpot, the step operation effect is harder to be selected than the non-step operation effect,
If the first specific notice effect is executed before the execution of the step operation effect, it indicates that there is a high possibility of a big hit, and the second specific notice effect is executed before the execution of the non-step operation effect. If so, suggest a jackpot,
A gaming machine characterized by that: